f67788735165f17659ea4e20186e8e12a8379793
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @dircategory Software development
5 @direntry
6 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
7 @end direntry
8
9 @ifinfo
10 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11 Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end ifinfo
24
25 @setchapternewpage off
26 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
28 @syncodeindex fn cp
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @titlepage
32 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
33 @subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34 @author John Gilmore
35 @author Cygnus Solutions
36 @author Second Edition:
37 @author Stan Shebs
38 @author Cygnus Solutions
39 @page
40 @tex
41 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
43 {\parskip=0pt
44 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45 \hfill \manvers\par
46 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47 }
48 @end tex
49
50 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51 Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
54 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59 Free Documentation License''.
60 @end titlepage
61
62 @contents
63
64 @node Top
65 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67 @top Scope of this Document
68
69 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
70 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
73 @menu
74 * Requirements::
75 * Overall Structure::
76 * Algorithms::
77 * User Interface::
78 * libgdb::
79 * Symbol Handling::
80 * Language Support::
81 * Host Definition::
82 * Target Architecture Definition::
83 * Target Descriptions::
84 * Target Vector Definition::
85 * Native Debugging::
86 * Support Libraries::
87 * Coding::
88 * Porting GDB::
89 * Versions and Branches::
90 * Start of New Year Procedure::
91 * Releasing GDB::
92 * Testsuite::
93 * Hints::
94
95 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
97 * Index::
98 @end menu
99
100 @node Requirements
101
102 @chapter Requirements
103 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
104
105 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
106 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
107 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
108 that have run counter to these requirements.
109
110 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
111 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
112 shell. It's not a programming environment.
113
114 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
115 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
116 programmer.
117
118 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
119 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
120 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
121 to debugger commands.
122
123 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
124 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
125 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
126 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
127 mollify the debugger.
128
129 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
130 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
131 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
132
133 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
134 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
135 supports.
136
137
138 @node Overall Structure
139
140 @chapter Overall Structure
141
142 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
143 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
144 @dfn{target side}).
145
146 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
147 supporting code.
148
149 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
150 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
151 parsing, type and value printing.
152
153 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
154 physical target manipulation.
155
156 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
157 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
158 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
159 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
160 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
161 should fit together.
162
163 @section The Symbol Side
164
165 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
166 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
167 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
168 many kinds of expressions.
169
170 @section The Target Side
171
172 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
173 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
174 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
175 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
176
177 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
178 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
179 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
180 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
181 way.
182
183 @section Configurations
184
185 @cindex host
186 @cindex target
187 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
188 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
189 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
190 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
191
192 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
193 Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
194 float format.
195
196 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
197 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
198 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
199 to call a function.
200
201 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
202 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
203 host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
204 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
205 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
206 in the native-dependent files.
207
208 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
209 are really part of the target environment, but which require
210 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
211 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
212
213 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
214 have to include all three kinds of information.
215
216 @section Source Tree Structure
217 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
218
219 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
220 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
221 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
222 @file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
223
224 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
225 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
226 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
227 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
228 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
229 parlance for the program being debugged).
230
231 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
232 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
233 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
234 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
235 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
236
237 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
238 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
239 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
240
241 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
242
243 @table @file
244 @item cli
245 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
246 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
247
248 @item gdbserver
249 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
250
251 @item gdbtk
252 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
253
254 @item mi
255 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
256
257 @item signals
258 Target signal translation code.
259
260 @item tui
261 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
262 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
263 @end table
264
265 @node Algorithms
266
267 @chapter Algorithms
268 @cindex algorithms
269
270 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
271 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
272 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
273 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
274 they use.
275
276 @section Frames
277
278 @cindex frame
279 @cindex call stack frame
280 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
281 and called functions.
282
283 @cindex frame, unwind
284 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
285 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
286 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
287 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
288 read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
289
290 @findex frame_register_unwind
291 @findex get_frame_register
292 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
293 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
294 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
295 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
296 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
297 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
298 frame itself?
299
300 @cindex sentinel frame
301 @findex get_frame_type
302 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
303 To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
304 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
305 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
306 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
307 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
308
309 @section Prologue Analysis
310
311 @cindex prologue analysis
312 @cindex call frame information
313 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
314 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
315 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
316 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
317 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
318 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
319 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
320 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
321 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
322
323 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
324 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
325 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
326 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
327 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
328 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
329 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
330 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
331 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
332 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
333 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
334 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
335 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
336
337 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
338 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
339 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
340 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
341 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
342 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
343 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
344 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
345 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
346 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
347
348 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
349 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
350 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
351 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
352 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
353 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
354 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
355 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
356 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
357 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
358 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
359 starts with the instruction:
360
361 @example
362 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
363 @end example
364 @noindent
365 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
366 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
367 value.
368
369 If we then see an instruction like:
370
371 @example
372 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
373 @end example
374 @noindent
375 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
376 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
377
378 If the next instruction were:
379
380 @example
381 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
382 @end example
383 @noindent
384 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
385 @code{r1} plus 64.
386
387 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
388 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
389 registers. So after an instruction like this:
390
391 @example
392 mov (fp+4), r2
393 @end example
394 @noindent
395 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
396 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
397
398 And so on.
399
400 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
401 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
402 the instruction:
403
404 @example
405 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
406 @end example
407 @noindent
408 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
409 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
410 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
411 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
412 information is acceptable for our application.
413
414 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
415 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
416 never inaccurate.
417
418 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
419 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
420 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
421 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
422 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
423 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
424 kept track of.
425
426 @itemize @bullet
427
428 @item
429 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
430 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
431 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
432 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
433 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
434 we don't know the frame size.
435
436 @item
437 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
438 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
439 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
440 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
441 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
442 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
443 @end itemize
444
445 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
446 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
447 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
448 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
449 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
450 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
451 and maintain. In the approach described above:
452
453 @itemize @bullet
454
455 @item
456 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
457 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
458 the effect of each instruction.
459
460 @item
461 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
462 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
463 wasn't already broken before.
464
465 @item
466 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
467 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
468 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
469 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
470 already gathering the right data for you.
471
472 @end itemize
473
474 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
475 the framework and how to use it.
476
477
478 @section Breakpoint Handling
479
480 @cindex breakpoints
481 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
482 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
483 that location.
484
485 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
486 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
487
488 @cindex hardware breakpoints
489 @cindex program counter
490 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
491 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
492 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
493 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
494 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
495 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
496
497 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
498 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
499 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
500 address.
501
502 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
503 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
504 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
505 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
506 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
507 for something to happen.
508
509 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
510 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
511 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
512 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
513 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
514 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
515 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
516
517 @cindex software breakpoints
518 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
519 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
520 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
521 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
522 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
523 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
524 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
525
526 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
527 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
528 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
529 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
530
531 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
532 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
533 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
534 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
535 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
536 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
537 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
538 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
539 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
540 instruction.
541
542 @findex BREAKPOINT
543 The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
544 @code{BREAKPOINT}.
545
546 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
547 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
548
549 @table @code
550 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
551 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
552 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
553 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
555 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
556 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
557 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
558 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
559 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
560 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
561 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
562 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
563 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
564 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
565 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
566 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
567 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
568 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
569
570 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
571 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
572 the length reported by @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} is cached in
573 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
574 used to remove the breakpoint.
575
576 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
577 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
578 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
579 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
581 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
582 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
583 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
584 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
585 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
586 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
587 but @code{placed_size} may be.
588 @end table
589
590 @section Single Stepping
591
592 @section Signal Handling
593
594 @section Thread Handling
595
596 @section Inferior Function Calls
597
598 @section Longjmp Support
599
600 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
601 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
602 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
603 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
604 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
605 command.
606
607 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
608 To make this work, you need to define a macro called
609 @code{GET_LONGJMP_TARGET}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
610 structure and extract the longjmp target address. Since @code{jmp_buf}
611 is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
612 @file{tm-@var{target}.h} file. Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
613 @file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
614
615 @section Watchpoints
616 @cindex watchpoints
617
618 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
619 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
620 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
621 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
622 hunt down and kill such bugs.
623
624 @cindex hardware watchpoints
625 @cindex software watchpoints
626 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
627 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
628 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
629 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
630 will use software watchpoints are:
631
632 @itemize @bullet
633 @item
634 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
635 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
636 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
637 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
638 watchpoints.
639
640 @item
641 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
642 registers (as opposed to memory).
643
644 @item
645 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
646 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
647 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
648 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
649 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
650
651 @item
652 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
653 implementation.
654 @end itemize
655
656 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
657 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
658 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
659 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
660
661 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
662 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
663 For a data-write watchpoint, it does so by evaluating, for each
664 watchpoint, the expression whose value is being watched, and testing
665 whether the watched value has changed. For data-read and data-access
666 watchpoints, @value{GDBN} needs the target to supply a primitive that
667 returns the address of the data that was accessed or read (see the
668 description of @code{target_stopped_data_address} below): if this
669 primitive returns a valid address, @value{GDBN} infers that a
670 watchpoint triggered if it watches an expression whose evaluation uses
671 that address.
672
673 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
674 watchpoints:
675
676 @table @code
677 @findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
678 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
679 If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
680
681 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
682 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
683 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
684 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
685 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
686 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
687 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
688 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
689 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
690 the same time).
691
692 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
693 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
694 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
695 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
696
697 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
698 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
699 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
700 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
701 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
702 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
703 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
704 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
705 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
706
707 @smallexample
708 enum target_hw_bp_type
709 @{
710 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
711 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
712 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
713 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
714 @};
715 @end smallexample
716
717 @noindent
718 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
719
720 @findex target_stopped_data_address
721 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
722 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
723 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
724 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. Note that
725 this primitive is used by @value{GDBN} only on targets that support
726 data-read or data-access type watchpoints, so targets that have
727 support only for data-write watchpoints need not implement these
728 primitives.
729
730 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
731 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
732 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
733 watchpoint to step over it.
734
735 @findex HAVE_NONSTEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
736 @item HAVE_NONSTEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
737 If defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
738 watchpoint to step the inferior over it.
739
740 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
741 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
742 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
743 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.
744
745 @findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
746 @item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
747 If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
748 watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
749
750 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
751 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
752 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
753 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
754 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
755 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
756 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
757 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
758 the @var{wait_status} argument.
759
760 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
761 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
762 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
763 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
764 @end table
765
766 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
767 @cindex x86 debug registers
768 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
769
770 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
771 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
772 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
773 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
774 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
775
776 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
777 following:
778
779 @itemize @bullet
780 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
781 @item
782 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
783 target-dependent headers.
784
785 @item
786 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
787 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
788
789 @item
790 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
791 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
792 @code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
793
794 @item
795 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
796 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
797 which does the real work.
798 @end itemize
799
800 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
801 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
802 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
803 provide:
804
805 @table @code
806 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
807 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
808 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
809
810 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
811 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
812 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
813
814 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
815 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
816 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
817 number @var{idx}.
818
819 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
820 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
821 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
822 used immediately after it is returned by
823 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
824 register values.
825 @end table
826
827 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
828 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
829 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
830 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
831 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
832 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
833 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
834 anything to use this feature.
835
836 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
837 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
838 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
839 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
840 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
841 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
842 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
843 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
844
845 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
846 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
847
848 @table @code
849 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
850 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
851 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
852 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
853 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
854 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
855 processors.
856
857 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
858 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
859 The target function
860 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
861 This
862 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
863 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
864 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
865 set in DR6.
866
867 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
868 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
869 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
870 is set to call this function. The
871 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
872 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
873 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
874 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
875 returned.
876
877 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
878 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
879 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
880 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
881 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
882 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
883 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
884 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
885 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
886 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
887 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
888 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
889 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
890 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
891 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
892 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
893 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
894 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
895 each debug register.
896
897 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
898 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
899 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
900 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
901 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
902 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
903 decrements the reference count, and only calls
904 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
905 the count goes to zero.
906
907 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
908 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
909 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
910 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
911 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
912 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
913 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
914 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
915 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
916 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
917 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
918 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
919 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
920 register.
921
922 @findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
923 @item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
924 This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
925 hardware breakpoint that triggered. It works like
926 @code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
927 address whose watchpoint triggered.
928
929 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
930 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
931 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
932 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
933 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
934 @end table
935
936 @noindent
937 @strong{Notes:}
938 @enumerate 1
939 @item
940 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
941 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
942 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
943 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
944 on x86.
945
946 @item
947 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
948 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
949 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
950 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
951 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
952 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
953 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
954 unavailable in many platforms.
955 @end enumerate
956
957 @section Checkpoints
958 @cindex checkpoints
959 @cindex restart
960 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
961 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
962
963 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
964 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
965 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
966 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
967 of open files and devices.
968
969 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
970 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
971 method implemented on the target side.
972
973 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
974 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
975 not typically include information about external entities such as
976 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
977
978 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
979 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
980 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
981 be used on other systems.
982
983 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
984 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
985 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
986 details of how it is done.
987
988
989 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
990 @cindex observer pattern interface
991 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
992
993 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
994 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
995 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
996 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
997 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
998 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
999 a strong limitation.
1000
1001 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1002 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1003 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1004 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1005 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1006 interface when adding new notifications.
1007
1008 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1009 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1010 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1011
1012 @node User Interface
1013
1014 @chapter User Interface
1015
1016 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces. Although the command-line interface
1017 is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1018
1019 @section Command Interpreter
1020
1021 @cindex command interpreter
1022 @cindex CLI
1023 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1024 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1025 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1026 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1027
1028 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1029 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1030 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1031
1032 @findex add_cmd
1033 @findex add_com
1034 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1035 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1036 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1037 the ends of most source files.
1038
1039 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1040 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1041 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1042 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1043 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1044 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1045 the new command structures for manipulation.
1046
1047 @cindex deprecating commands
1048 @findex deprecate_cmd
1049 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1050 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1051 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1052 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1053 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1054 command immediately after it is created.
1055
1056 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1057 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1058 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1059 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1060
1061 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1062 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1063 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1064
1065 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1066 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1067 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1068 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1069 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1070 every UI, to produce output.
1071
1072 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1073
1074 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1075 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1076
1077 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1078
1079 @itemize @bullet
1080 @item
1081 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1082
1083 @item
1084 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1085 operation;
1086
1087 @item
1088 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1089 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1090
1091 @item
1092 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1093
1094 @item
1095 to show @emph{debug data};
1096
1097 @item
1098 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1099 @end itemize
1100
1101 @noindent
1102 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1103 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1104
1105 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1106 involves one or more of the following:
1107
1108 @itemize @bullet
1109 @item
1110 output of the actual data
1111
1112 @item
1113 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1114 easily readable by humans
1115
1116 @item
1117 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1118 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1119
1120 @item
1121 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1122 parts in the output
1123 @end itemize
1124
1125 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1126 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1127 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1128 deprecated.
1129
1130 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1131 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1132 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1133 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1134
1135 @table @code
1136 @item <table> @expansion{}
1137 @code{<header> <body>}
1138 @item <header> @expansion{}
1139 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1140 @item <column> @expansion{}
1141 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1142 @item <body> @expansion{}
1143 @code{@{<row>@}}
1144 @end table
1145
1146
1147 @subsection General Conventions
1148
1149 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1150 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1151 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1152
1153 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1154 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1155
1156 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1157 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1158 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1159 format.
1160
1161 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1162 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1163
1164
1165 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1166
1167 @cindex list output functions
1168 @cindex table output functions
1169 @cindex tuple output functions
1170 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1171 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1172 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1173
1174 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1175 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1176 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1177
1178 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1179 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1180 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1181
1182 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1183 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1184 maximum of five levels.
1185
1186 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1187
1188 @smallexample
1189 ui_out_table_begin
1190 ui_out_table_header
1191 @dots{}
1192 ui_out_table_body
1193 ui_out_tuple_begin
1194 ui_out_field_*
1195 @dots{}
1196 ui_out_tuple_end
1197 @dots{}
1198 ui_out_table_end
1199 @end smallexample
1200
1201 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1202 functions:
1203
1204 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1205 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1206 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1207 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1208 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1209 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1210 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1211 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1212 was @code{malloc}ed.
1213
1214 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1215 the end of the table's output.
1216 @end deftypefun
1217
1218 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1219 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1220 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1221 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1222 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1223
1224 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1225 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1226 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1227 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1228 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1229 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1230 call.
1231 @end deftypefun
1232
1233 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1234 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1235 @end deftypefun
1236
1237 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1238 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1239 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1240 functions.
1241
1242 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1243 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1244 will signal an internal error.
1245 @end deftypefun
1246
1247 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1248 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1249 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1250 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1251 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1252
1253 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1254 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1255 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1256 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1257 after the call.
1258 @end deftypefun
1259
1260 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1261 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1262 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1263 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1264 be signaled.
1265 @end deftypefun
1266
1267 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1268 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1269 (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple. It provides a convenient
1270 and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1271 cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1272 @smallexample
1273 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1274 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1275 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1276 uiout);
1277 @end smallexample
1278 @end deftypefun
1279
1280 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1281 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1282 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1283 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1284 after the call.
1285 @end deftypefun
1286
1287 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1288 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1289 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1290 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1291 be signaled.
1292 @end deftypefun
1293
1294 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1295 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1296 opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1297 that will close the list.list.
1298 @end deftypefun
1299
1300 @subsection Item Output Functions
1301
1302 @cindex item output functions
1303 @cindex field output functions
1304 @cindex data output
1305 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1306 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1307
1308 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1309
1310 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1311 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1312 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1313 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1314 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1315 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1316 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1317
1318 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1319 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1320 @end deftypefun
1321
1322 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1323 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1324 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1325 the name of the field.
1326 @end deftypefun
1327
1328 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1329 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1330 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1331 @var{fldname} specifies
1332 the name of the field.
1333 @end deftypefun
1334
1335 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1336 This function outputs an address.
1337 @end deftypefun
1338
1339 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1340 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1341 specification.
1342 @end deftypefun
1343
1344 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1345 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1346 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1347 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1348 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1349 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1350 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1351 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1352 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1353 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1354 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1355 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1356 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1357 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1358
1359 @deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1360 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1361 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1362 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1363 @code{ui_stream} object.
1364 @end deftypefun
1365
1366 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1367 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1368 @var{streambuf}.
1369 @end deftypefun
1370
1371 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1372 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1373 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1374 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1375 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1376 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1377 @end deftypefun
1378
1379 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1380 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1381 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1382 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1383 skeleton code to do that:
1384
1385 @smallexample
1386 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1387 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1388 ...
1389 do_cleanups (old);
1390 @end smallexample
1391
1392 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1393 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1394
1395 @smallexample
1396 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1397 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1398 @end smallexample
1399
1400 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1401 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1402 same buffer twice.
1403
1404 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1405
1406 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1407 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1408 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1409 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1410 @end deftypefun
1411
1412 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1413 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1414 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1415 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1416 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1417
1418 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1419 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1420 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1421 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1422 output short messages.
1423 @end deftypefun
1424
1425 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1426 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1427 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1428 list.
1429 @end deftypefun
1430
1431 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1432 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1433 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1434 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1435 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1436 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1437 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1438 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1439 @end deftypefun
1440
1441 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1442 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1443 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1444 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1445 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1446 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1447 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1448 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1449 @end deftypefun
1450
1451 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1452 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1453 the UI buffers output.
1454 @end deftypefun
1455
1456
1457 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1458
1459 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1460 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1461 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1462 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1463 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1464 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1465
1466 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1467 produce a table.
1468
1469 The original code was:
1470
1471 @smallexample
1472 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1473 @{
1474 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1475
1476 annotate_field (0);
1477 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1478 annotate_field (1);
1479 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1480 annotate_field (2);
1481 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1482 annotate_field (3);
1483 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1484 if (addressprint)
1485 @{
1486 annotate_field (4);
1487 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1488 @}
1489 annotate_field (5);
1490 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1491
1492 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1493 @}
1494 @end smallexample
1495
1496 Here's the new version:
1497
1498 @smallexample
1499 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1500
1501 if (addressprint)
1502 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1503 else
1504 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1505
1506 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1507 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1508 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1509 annotate_field (0);
1510 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1511 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1512 annotate_field (1);
1513 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1514 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1515 annotate_field (2);
1516 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1517 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1518 annotate_field (3);
1519 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1520 if (addressprint)
1521 @{
1522 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1523 annotate_field (4);
1524 if (TARGET_ADDR_BIT <= 32)
1525 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1526 else
1527 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1528 @}
1529 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1530 annotate_field (5);
1531 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1532 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1533 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1534 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1535 @end smallexample
1536
1537 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1538 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1539 in the above example. The original code was:
1540
1541 @smallexample
1542 annotate_record ();
1543 annotate_field (0);
1544 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1545 annotate_field (1);
1546 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1547 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1548 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1549 (int)b->type);
1550 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1551 annotate_field (2);
1552 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1553 annotate_field (3);
1554 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1555 @dots{}
1556 @end smallexample
1557
1558 This is the new version:
1559
1560 @smallexample
1561 annotate_record ();
1562 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1563 annotate_field (0);
1564 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1565 annotate_field (1);
1566 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1567 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1568 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1569 (int) b->type);
1570 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1571 annotate_field (2);
1572 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1573 annotate_field (3);
1574 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1575 @dots{}
1576 @end smallexample
1577
1578 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1579 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1580 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1581 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1582
1583 @smallexample
1584 annotate_field (5);
1585 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1586 @end smallexample
1587
1588 The new version is:
1589
1590 @smallexample
1591 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1592 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1593 ...
1594 annotate_field (5);
1595 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1596 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1597 @end smallexample
1598
1599 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1600 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1601 was:
1602
1603 @smallexample
1604 annotate_field (5);
1605 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1606 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1607 else
1608 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1609 @end smallexample
1610
1611 It became:
1612
1613 @smallexample
1614 annotate_field (5);
1615 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1616 @{
1617 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1618 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1619 @}
1620 else
1621 @{
1622 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1623 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1624 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1625 @}
1626 @end smallexample
1627
1628 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1629 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1630 code was:
1631
1632 @smallexample
1633 annotate_field (5);
1634 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1635 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1636 @end smallexample
1637
1638 It became:
1639
1640 @smallexample
1641 annotate_field (5);
1642 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1643 @{
1644 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1645 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1646 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1647 @}
1648 @end smallexample
1649
1650 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1651 code was:
1652
1653 @smallexample
1654 annotate_field (5);
1655 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1656 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1657 @end smallexample
1658
1659 It became:
1660
1661 @smallexample
1662 annotate_field (5);
1663 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1664 @{
1665 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1666 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1667 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1668 @}
1669 @end smallexample
1670
1671 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1672
1673 @smallexample
1674 annotate_field (4);
1675 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1676 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1677 @end smallexample
1678
1679 It became:
1680
1681 @smallexample
1682 annotate_field (4);
1683 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1684 @end smallexample
1685
1686
1687 @section Console Printing
1688
1689 @section TUI
1690
1691 @node libgdb
1692
1693 @chapter libgdb
1694
1695 @section libgdb 1.0
1696 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1697 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1698 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1699
1700 @section libgdb 2.0
1701 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1702 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1703 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1704
1705 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1706 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1707
1708 @itemize @bullet
1709 @item
1710 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1711 @item
1712 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1713 @item
1714 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1715 @item
1716 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1717 @end itemize
1718
1719 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1720
1721 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1722
1723 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1724
1725 @itemize @bullet
1726 @item
1727 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1728 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1729 state, etc).
1730 @item
1731 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1732 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1733 @end itemize
1734
1735 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1736 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1737 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1738 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1739 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1740
1741 @section CLI support
1742
1743 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1744 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1745 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1746 requirements.
1747
1748 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1749 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1750 out the theory:
1751
1752 @itemize @bullet
1753 @item
1754 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1755 @item
1756 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1757 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1758 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1759 @item
1760 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1761 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1762 @end itemize
1763
1764 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1765 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1766 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1767 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1768 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1769 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1770
1771 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1772 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1773 client's custom builder).
1774
1775 @section @code{libgdb} components
1776
1777 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1778 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1779 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1780 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1781 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1782 finished the current command.
1783
1784 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1785 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1786 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1787 when doing any queries.
1788
1789 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1790 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1791 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1792 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1793 implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1794
1795 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1796 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1797 instead of returning.
1798
1799 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1800 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1801 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1802 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1803 before the query function returns.
1804
1805 @node Symbol Handling
1806
1807 @chapter Symbol Handling
1808
1809 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include variables,
1810 functions, and types.
1811
1812 @section Symbol Reading
1813
1814 @cindex symbol reading
1815 @cindex reading of symbols
1816 @cindex symbol files
1817 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
1818 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1819 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1820 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1821 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1822 reading symbols from shared libraries.
1823
1824 @findex find_sym_fns
1825 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1826 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
1827 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1828 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1829
1830 @findex add_symtab_fns
1831 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1832 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1833 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1834 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
1835 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1836 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1837 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
1838 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1839 prefix.
1840
1841 The functions supplied by each module are:
1842
1843 @table @code
1844 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1845
1846 @cindex secondary symbol file
1847 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1848 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1849 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1850 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1851 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1852 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1853
1854 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1855 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1856 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1857 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
1858 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1859 in the @code{private} field.
1860
1861 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1862 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1863
1864 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1865
1866 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1867 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1868 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1869 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
1870 arguments and no result. It may be called after
1871 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1872 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1873
1874 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1875
1876 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1877 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1878
1879 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1880 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
1881 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1882 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1883 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1884 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1885 @end table
1886
1887 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1888 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1889 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1890 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1891
1892 @table @code
1893 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1894
1895 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1896 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1897 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1898 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1899 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1900 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1901 @end table
1902
1903 @section Partial Symbol Tables
1904
1905 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1906
1907 @itemize @bullet
1908 @cindex full symbol table
1909 @cindex symtabs
1910 @item
1911 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
1912 information about symbols and addresses.
1913
1914 @cindex psymtabs
1915 @item
1916 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
1917 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1918 symbol table.
1919
1920 @cindex minimal symbol table
1921 @cindex minsymtabs
1922 @item
1923 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
1924 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1925 @end itemize
1926
1927 @cindex partial symbol table
1928 This section describes partial symbol tables.
1929
1930 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1931 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
1932 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1933 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1934 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1935 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1936 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1937 the user.
1938 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1939
1940 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1941 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1942 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1943 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1944
1945 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1946 full symbol table would represent.
1947
1948 @cindex finding a symbol
1949 @cindex symbol lookup
1950 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
1951 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
1952
1953 @itemize @bullet
1954 @findex find_pc_function
1955 @findex find_pc_line
1956 @item
1957 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
1958 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
1959 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
1960 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
1961 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
1962
1963 @cindex lookup_symbol
1964 @item
1965 By its name
1966 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
1967 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
1968 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
1969 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
1970 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
1971 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
1972 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
1973 does most of the work here.
1974 @end itemize
1975
1976 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
1977 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
1978 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
1979 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
1980 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
1981 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
1982 name.
1983
1984 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
1985 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
1986 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
1987 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
1988 ranges.
1989
1990 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
1991 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
1992 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
1993 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
1994 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
1995 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
1996 unless you want to do a lot more work.
1997
1998 @section Types
1999
2000 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2001
2002 @cindex fundamental types
2003 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2004 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2005 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2006 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2007 knows about.
2008
2009 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2010
2011 @cindex type codes
2012 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2013 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2014 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2015 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2016 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2017 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2018 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2019
2020 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2021
2022 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2023 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2024 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2025 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2026 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2027 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2028 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2029 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2030 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2031 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2032 some particular objfile.
2033
2034 @section Object File Formats
2035 @cindex object file formats
2036
2037 @subsection a.out
2038
2039 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2040 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2041 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2042 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2043 respectively.
2044
2045 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2046 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2047 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2048 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2049 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2050
2051 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2052
2053 @subsection COFF
2054
2055 @cindex COFF format
2056 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2057 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2058 number of sections is limited.
2059
2060 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2061 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited. For
2062 instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2063 included file.
2064
2065 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2066
2067 @subsection ECOFF
2068
2069 @cindex ECOFF format
2070 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2071 workstations.
2072
2073 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2074
2075 @subsection XCOFF
2076
2077 @cindex XCOFF format
2078 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2079 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2080 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2081 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2082 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2083
2084 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2085 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2086 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2087 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2088 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2089 been run (or the core file has been read).
2090
2091 @subsection PE
2092
2093 @cindex PE-COFF format
2094 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2095 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2096
2097 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2098 COFF reader.
2099
2100 @subsection ELF
2101
2102 @cindex ELF format
2103 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is similar
2104 to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2105 many of COFF's limitations.
2106
2107 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2108
2109 @subsection SOM
2110
2111 @cindex SOM format
2112 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2113 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2114
2115 The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2116
2117 @section Debugging File Formats
2118
2119 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2120 are independent of the object file format.
2121
2122 @subsection stabs
2123
2124 @cindex stabs debugging info
2125 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2126 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2127 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2128
2129 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2130 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2131 the real work.
2132
2133 @subsection COFF
2134
2135 @cindex COFF debugging info
2136 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2137 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2138
2139 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2140
2141 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2142 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2143
2144 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2145
2146 @subsection DWARF 2
2147
2148 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2149 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2150
2151 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2152
2153 @subsection SOM
2154
2155 @cindex SOM debugging info
2156 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2157
2158 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2159
2160 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2161 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2162 there is probably little to be done.
2163
2164 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2165 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2166
2167 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2168 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2169 from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2170 information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2171 internal data structures.
2172
2173 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2174 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2175 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2176 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2177 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2178 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2179
2180 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2181
2182 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2183 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2184 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2185
2186 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2187 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2188 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2189 they could be unloaded at different times.
2190
2191 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2192 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2193 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2194 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2195
2196
2197 @node Language Support
2198
2199 @chapter Language Support
2200
2201 @cindex language support
2202 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2203 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2204 manually.
2205
2206 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2207 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2208 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2209 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2210
2211 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2212
2213 @cindex adding source language
2214 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2215 following steps:
2216
2217 @table @emph
2218 @item Create the expression parser.
2219
2220 @cindex expression parser
2221 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2222 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2223 @file{parse.c}.
2224
2225 @cindex language parser
2226 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2227 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2228 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2229 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2230
2231 @smallexample
2232 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2233 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2234 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2235 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2236 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2237 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2238 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2239 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2240 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2241 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2242 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2243 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2244 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2245 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2246 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2247 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2248 @end smallexample
2249
2250 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2251 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2252 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2253 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2254 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2255 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2256 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2257 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2258 for more information.
2259
2260 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2261
2262 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2263 @findex evaluate_subexp
2264 @findex prefixify_subexp
2265 @findex length_of_subexp
2266 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2267 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2268 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2269 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2270 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2271 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2272 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2273
2274 @item Update some existing code
2275
2276 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2277 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2278
2279 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2280 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2281 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2282 statement, an error is reported.
2283
2284 @vindex current_language
2285 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2286 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2287 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2288 string.
2289
2290 @findex _initialize_language
2291 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2292 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2293 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2294
2295 @findex allocate_symtab
2296 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2297 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2298 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2299 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2300 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2301 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2302 code.
2303
2304 @findex print_subexp
2305 @findex op_print_tab
2306 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2307 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2308 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2309
2310 @item Add a place of call
2311
2312 @findex parse_exp_1
2313 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2314 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2315
2316 @item Use macros to trim code
2317
2318 @cindex trimming language-dependent code
2319 The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2320 languages. If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2321 @var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2322 macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it. Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2323 leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2324 using your language.
2325
2326 Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2327 is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2328 compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2329
2330 See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2331 for different languages.
2332
2333 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2334
2335 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2336 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2337 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2338 distribution!
2339 @end table
2340
2341
2342 @node Host Definition
2343
2344 @chapter Host Definition
2345
2346 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2347 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2348 mainly, as an historical reference.
2349
2350 @section Adding a New Host
2351
2352 @cindex adding a new host
2353 @cindex host, adding
2354 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2355 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2356 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2357 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2358 eventually disappear.
2359
2360 @table @file
2361 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2362 This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2363 (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}. The host
2364 configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2365
2366 Host configuration information included a definition of
2367 @code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2368 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2369 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2370
2371 New host only configurations do not need this file.
2372
2373 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2374 This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2375 gdb on machine @var{xyz}. Those definitions and includes are now
2376 handled by Autoconf.
2377
2378 New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2379
2380 @emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2381 file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2382 @var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}. That code
2383 also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2384
2385 @end table
2386
2387 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2388
2389 @cindex generic host support
2390 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2391 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
2392 defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
2393 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2394 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2395
2396 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2397 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2398 Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2399 into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2400
2401 @table @file
2402 @cindex remote debugging support
2403 @cindex serial line support
2404 @item ser-unix.c
2405 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. This is always
2406 included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2407 variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2408
2409 @item ser-go32.c
2410 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2411 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2412
2413 @cindex TCP remote support
2414 @item ser-tcp.c
2415 This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2416 @end table
2417
2418 @section Host Conditionals
2419
2420 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2421 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2422 attributes of the host system. These macros and their meanings (or if
2423 the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2424 they are used is indicated) are:
2425
2426 @ftable @code
2427 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2428 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2429 @file{.gdbinit}).
2430
2431 @item NO_STD_REGS
2432 This macro is deprecated.
2433
2434 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2435 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2436 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2437
2438 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2439 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2440 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2441
2442 @item ALIGN_STACK_ON_STARTUP
2443 @cindex stack alignment
2444 Define this if your system is of a sort that will crash in
2445 @code{tgetent} if the stack happens not to be longword-aligned when
2446 @code{main} is called. This is a rare situation, but is known to occur
2447 on several different types of systems.
2448
2449 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2450 @cindex DOS text files
2451 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2452 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2453 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2454 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2455 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2456
2457 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2458 @cindex prompt
2459 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2460
2461 @item DEV_TTY
2462 @cindex terminal device
2463 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2464
2465 @item FOPEN_RB
2466 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2467
2468 @item HAVE_MMAP
2469 @findex mmap
2470 In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2471 tables. For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2472
2473 @item HAVE_TERMIO
2474 Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2475
2476 @item INT_MAX
2477 @itemx INT_MIN
2478 @itemx LONG_MAX
2479 @itemx UINT_MAX
2480 @itemx ULONG_MAX
2481 Values for host-side constants.
2482
2483 @item ISATTY
2484 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2485
2486 @item LONGEST
2487 This is the longest integer type available on the host. If not defined,
2488 it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2489 @code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2490
2491 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2492 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2493 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2494 by the @code{configure} script.
2495
2496 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2497 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2498 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2499 @code{configure} script.
2500
2501 @item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2502 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}. This is
2503 set by the @code{configure} script.
2504
2505 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2506 Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2507 numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}. This is
2508 set by the @code{configure} script.
2509
2510 @item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2511 Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2512 float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2513 @code{Lg}. This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2514
2515 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2516 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2517 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2518 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2519
2520 @item L_SET
2521 This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2522 @code{bfd_seek}). FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2523 which is the POSIX equivalent.
2524
2525 @item NORETURN
2526 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2527 that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2528 indicate that they never return. The default is already set correctly
2529 if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be defined.
2530
2531 @item ATTR_NORETURN
2532 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2533 @code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2534 of functions to indicate that they never return. The default is already
2535 set correctly if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be
2536 defined.
2537
2538 @item SEEK_CUR
2539 @itemx SEEK_SET
2540 Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2541 defined.
2542
2543 @item STOP_SIGNAL
2544 This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}. Defaults to
2545 @code{SIGTSTP}. (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2546
2547 @item USG
2548 Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use. (FIXME:
2549 This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2550 @file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2551
2552 @item lint
2553 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2554
2555 @item volatile
2556 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2557 @code{/**/}.
2558 @end ftable
2559
2560
2561 @node Target Architecture Definition
2562
2563 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2564
2565 @cindex target architecture definition
2566 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2567 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2568 with them.
2569
2570 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2571 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2572 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2573
2574 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2575 @cindex OS ABI variants
2576
2577 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2578 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2579 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2580 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2581
2582 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2583 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2584 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2585 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2586 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2587 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2588 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2589 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2590 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2591 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2592 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2593
2594 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2595 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2596 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2597 for each BFD architecture.
2598
2599 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2600
2601 @table @code
2602
2603 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2604 @item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2605 Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2606
2607 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2608 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2609 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2610 settings for the architecture will be used.
2611
2612 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2613 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2614 UNIX System V Release 4.
2615
2616 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2617 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2618 GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2619
2620 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2621 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2622 Sun Solaris.
2623
2624 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2625 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2626 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2627
2628 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2629 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2630 GNU using the Linux kernel.
2631
2632 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2633 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2634 FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2635
2636 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2637 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2638 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2639
2640 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2641 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2642 NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2643
2644 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2645 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2646 NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2647
2648 @findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2649 @item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2650 OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2651
2652 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2653 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2654 Windows CE.
2655
2656 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2657 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2658 DJGPP.
2659
2660 @findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2661 @item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2662 Irix.
2663
2664 @findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2665 @item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2666 Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2667
2668 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2669 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2670 HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2671
2672 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2673 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2674 HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2675
2676 @findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2677 @item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2678 QNX Neutrino.
2679
2680 @findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2681 @item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2682 Cygwin.
2683
2684 @findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2685 @item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2686 AIX.
2687
2688 @end table
2689
2690 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2691
2692 @deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2693 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2694 @end deftypefun
2695
2696 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2697 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2698 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2699 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2700 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2701 will suffice.
2702 @end deftypefun
2703
2704 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2705 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2706 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2707 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2708 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2709 any architecture.
2710 @end deftypefun
2711
2712 @deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2713 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2714 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2715 be determined.
2716 @end deftypefun
2717
2718 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2719 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2720 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2721 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2722 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2723 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2724 @end deftypefun
2725
2726 @deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2727 Helper routine for ELF file sniffers. Examine the file described by
2728 @var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2729 from the note. This function should be called via
2730 @code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2731 @end deftypefun
2732
2733 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2734
2735 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2736 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant. The @code{gdbarch} is
2737 registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2738 the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2739 be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments
2740 are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2741
2742 The initialization function has this type:
2743
2744 @smallexample
2745 static struct gdbarch *
2746 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2747 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2748 @end smallexample
2749
2750 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2751 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2752 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2753 value.
2754
2755 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2756 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
2757 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2758 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2759 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2760
2761 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2762 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2763 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2764 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2765 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2766 defaults from @var{arches}.
2767
2768 @section Registers and Memory
2769
2770 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2771 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2772 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
2773
2774 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2775 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2776 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
2777 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2778 and to reflect that in the @code{REGISTER_NAME} and related macros.
2779
2780 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2781
2782 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2783 @cindex pointer representation
2784 @cindex address representation
2785 @cindex word-addressed machines
2786 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
2787 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2788 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2789 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2790 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2791 @cindex D10V addresses
2792
2793 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2794 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2795 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
2796 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2797 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2798 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2799 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2800
2801 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2802 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2803 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
2804 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2805 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2806 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2807 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2808 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2809 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2810 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
2811 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2812 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2813 code space.
2814
2815 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2816 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2817 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2818 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2819
2820 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2821 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2822 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2823
2824 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2825 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2826 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2827 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
2828 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2829 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2830 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2831 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2832
2833 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2834 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
2835 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2836 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2837 clean up some architecture-independent code.
2838
2839 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2840
2841 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2842 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2843 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2844 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
2845 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
2846 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2847 inferior's.
2848
2849 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2850 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2851 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
2852 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2853 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2854
2855 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2856 will signal an internal error.
2857 @end deftypefun
2858
2859 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2860 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2861 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
2862 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2863 inferior's.
2864
2865 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2866 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2867 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
2868 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2869 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2870
2871 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2872 will signal an internal error.
2873 @end deftypefun
2874
2875 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2876 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2877 as appropriate for the current architecture.
2878
2879 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2880 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2881 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2882 @end deftypefun
2883
2884 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2885 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2886 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2887 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2888 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2889 @end deftypefun
2890
2891 Here are some macros which architectures can define to indicate the
2892 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
2893 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2894 simple unsigned byte addresses.
2895
2896 @deftypefn {Target Macro} CORE_ADDR POINTER_TO_ADDRESS (struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2897 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2898 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
2899 address the pointer refers to.
2900
2901 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2902 C@t{++} reference type.
2903 @end deftypefn
2904
2905 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void ADDRESS_TO_POINTER (struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2906 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2907 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2908
2909 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2910 C@t{++} reference type.
2911 @end deftypefn
2912
2913 @section Address Classes
2914 @cindex address classes
2915 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2916 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
2917
2918 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2919 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
2920 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
2921 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2922 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2923 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2924 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2925 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2926 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2927
2928 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
2929 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
2930 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
2931 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
2932 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2933 @end deftypefn
2934
2935 @deftypefn {Target Macro} char *ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME (int @var{type_flags})
2936 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
2937 its name.
2938 @end deftypefn
2939 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_to_TYPE_FLAGS (int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
2940 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
2941 for that address class qualifier.
2942 @end deftypefn
2943
2944 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
2945 the address class macros defined by default. Predicate
2946 macros are provided to detect when they are defined.
2947
2948 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
2949 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
2950 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
2951 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
2952 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
2953 to implement the address class macros:
2954
2955 @smallexample
2956 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
2957 int dwarf2_addr_class)
2958 @{
2959 if (byte_size == 2)
2960 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
2961 else
2962 return 0;
2963 @}
2964
2965 static char *
2966 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
2967 @{
2968 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
2969 return "short";
2970 else
2971 return NULL;
2972 @}
2973
2974 int
2975 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
2976 int *type_flags_ptr)
2977 @{
2978 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
2979 @{
2980 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
2981 return 1;
2982 @}
2983 else
2984 return 0;
2985 @}
2986 @end smallexample
2987
2988 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
2989 to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers. E.g, if
2990 the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
2991 short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
2992
2993 @smallexample
2994 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
2995 type = int * @@short
2996 @end smallexample
2997
2998
2999 @section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
3000 @cindex raw register representation
3001 @cindex virtual register representation
3002 @cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
3003
3004 @emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete. The
3005 functionality described here has largely been replaced by
3006 pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
3007 Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3008 Representations}. See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3009 Bug Tracking Database} and
3010 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3011 up-to-date information.}
3012
3013 Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3014 register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3015 In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3016 the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3017 used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3018
3019 @emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3020 both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3021 register forms.}
3022
3023 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3024 raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3025 However, they do occasionally differ. For example:
3026
3027 @itemize @bullet
3028 @item
3029 The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type. However, when
3030 we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3031 floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3032 are unused. This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3033 allowing more efficient access. Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3034 type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3035 arrangement is the virtual representation.
3036
3037 @item
3038 Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3039 registers, with garbage in their upper bits. @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3040 bits. Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3041 raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3042 virtual representation.
3043 @end itemize
3044
3045 In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3046 @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3047 can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience. @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3048 @code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3049 @value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3050
3051 Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3052 conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3053
3054 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3055 Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3056 and virtual formats.
3057
3058 You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3059 unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3060 @end deftypefn
3061
3062 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3063 The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value. This is the number
3064 of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3065 remote protocol packet.
3066 @end deftypefn
3067
3068 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3069 The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3070 This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3071 register's value.
3072 @end deftypefn
3073
3074 @deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3075 This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3076 @var{reg}. Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3077 register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3078 always uses the virtual form.
3079 @end deftypefn
3080
3081 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3082 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3083 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3084 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3085 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3086
3087 Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3088 @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3089 arguments in different orders.
3090
3091 You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3092 for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3093 value.
3094 @end deftypefn
3095
3096 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3097 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3098 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3099 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3100 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3101
3102 Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3103 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3104 @end deftypefn
3105
3106
3107 @section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3108 @cindex register representation
3109 @cindex memory representation
3110 @cindex representations, register and memory
3111 @cindex register data formats, converting
3112 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3113
3114 @emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3115 significant change. Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3116 section are likely to be subject to further revision. See
3117 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3118 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3119 further information. cagney/2002-05-06.}
3120
3121 Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3122 form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3123 For example:
3124
3125 @itemize @bullet
3126
3127 @item
3128 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3129 floating-point registers.
3130
3131 @item
3132 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3133 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3134 when stored in a register.
3135
3136 @end itemize
3137
3138 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3139 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3140 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3141 Interface.
3142
3143 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3144 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3145 However, they do occasionally differ. Your architecture may define the
3146 following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3147 representations of a data type:
3148
3149 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int CONVERT_REGISTER_P (int @var{reg})
3150 Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3151 register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3152 when stored in memory.
3153
3154 When non-zero, the macros @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and
3155 @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3156 @end deftypefn
3157
3158 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_TO_VALUE (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3159 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3160 @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3161 format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3162
3163 Note that @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} take
3164 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3165
3166 You should only use @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} with registers for which
3167 the @code{CONVERT_REGISTER_P} macro returns a non-zero value.
3168 @end deftypefn
3169
3170 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void VALUE_TO_REGISTER (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3171 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3172 raw format.
3173
3174 Note that @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} take
3175 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3176
3177 You should only use @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} with registers for which
3178 the @code{CONVERT_REGISTER_P} macro returns a non-zero value.
3179 @end deftypefn
3180
3181 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3182 See @file{mips-tdep.c}. It does not do what you want.
3183 @end deftypefn
3184
3185
3186 @section Frame Interpretation
3187
3188 @section Inferior Call Setup
3189
3190 @section Compiler Characteristics
3191
3192 @section Target Conditionals
3193
3194 This section describes the macros that you can use to define the target
3195 machine.
3196
3197 @table @code
3198
3199 @item ADDR_BITS_REMOVE (addr)
3200 @findex ADDR_BITS_REMOVE
3201 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3202 really part of the address, then define this macro to expand into an
3203 expression that zeroes those bits in @var{addr}. This is only used for
3204 addresses of instructions, and even then not in all contexts.
3205
3206 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3207 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3208 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3209 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3210 address of the instruction. ADDR_BITS_REMOVE should filter out these
3211 bits with an expression such as @code{((addr) & ~3)}.
3212
3213 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3214 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS
3215 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3216 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3217 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3218 return 0.
3219
3220 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3221 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3222 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3223 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3224
3225 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS_P ()
3226 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS_P
3227 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS}
3228 has been defined.
3229
3230 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3231 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3232 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3233 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3234 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
3235 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3236 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3237 values or'd together.
3238 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3239
3240 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_P ()
3241 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_P
3242 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS} has
3243 been defined.
3244
3245 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME (@var{type_flags})
3246 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME
3247 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3248 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3249
3250 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME_P ()
3251 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME_P
3252 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME} has
3253 been defined.
3254 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3255
3256 @item ADDRESS_TO_POINTER (@var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3257 @findex ADDRESS_TO_POINTER
3258 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3259 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3260 This macro may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3261 C@t{++} reference type.
3262 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3263
3264 @item BELIEVE_PCC_PROMOTION
3265 @findex BELIEVE_PCC_PROMOTION
3266 Define if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3267 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3268 original type, rather than the promoted type.
3269
3270 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3271 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3272 Define this if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match the
3273 endianness of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
3274 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3275
3276 @item BREAKPOINT
3277 @findex BREAKPOINT
3278 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3279 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
3280 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3281 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
3282 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3283
3284 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3285 @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC}.
3286
3287 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3288 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3289 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3290 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3291 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3292
3293 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3294 favor of @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC}.
3295
3296 @item BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC (@var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3297 @findex BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC
3298 @anchor{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} Use the program counter to determine the
3299 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
3300 a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3301 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3302 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3303 breakpoint should be inserted.
3304
3305 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3306 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3307 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3308 instruction of the architecture.
3309
3310 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3311
3312 @item MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT (@var{bp_tgt})
3313 @itemx MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT (@var{bp_tgt})
3314 @findex MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT
3315 @findex MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT
3316 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
3317 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3318 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3319 provided so that it is not necessary to define these for most
3320 architectures. Architectures which may want to define
3321 @code{MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT} and @code{MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT} will
3322 likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3323 conventional manner.
3324
3325 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3326 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3327 @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} needs to read the target's memory for some
3328 reason.
3329
3330 @item ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS (@var{address})
3331 @findex ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS
3332 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3333 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3334 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3335 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
3336
3337 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3338 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3339 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3340 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
3341 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3342 in parallel.
3343
3344 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3345 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
3346 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3347 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
3348 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3349 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3350 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3351 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3352 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3353 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3354
3355 The FR-V's @code{ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS} method will adjust a
3356 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3357 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3358
3359 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3360 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3361 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3362
3363 @item CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION
3364 @findex CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION
3365 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3366
3367 This method has been replaced by @code{push_dummy_code}
3368 (@pxref{push_dummy_code}).
3369
3370 @item CANNOT_FETCH_REGISTER (@var{regno})
3371 @findex CANNOT_FETCH_REGISTER
3372 A C expression that should be nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3373 from an inferior process. This is only relevant if
3374 @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3375
3376 @item CANNOT_STORE_REGISTER (@var{regno})
3377 @findex CANNOT_STORE_REGISTER
3378 A C expression that should be nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3379 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
3380 status words, and other special registers. If this is not defined,
3381 @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3382
3383 @item int CONVERT_REGISTER_P(@var{regnum})
3384 @findex CONVERT_REGISTER_P
3385 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} can represent data values in a
3386 non-standard form.
3387 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3388
3389 @item DECR_PC_AFTER_BREAK
3390 @findex DECR_PC_AFTER_BREAK
3391 Define this to be the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3392 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
3393 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
3394
3395 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3396 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3397 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3398 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3399
3400 @item PRINT_FLOAT_INFO()
3401 @findex PRINT_FLOAT_INFO
3402 If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3403 the processor's floating point unit.
3404
3405 @item print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3406 @findex print_registers_info
3407 If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3408 specified @var{frame}. If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3409 either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3410 registers (@var{all} is zero).
3411
3412 The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3413 zero omits floating-point registers.
3414
3415 @item PRINT_VECTOR_INFO()
3416 @findex PRINT_VECTOR_INFO
3417 If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3418 to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3419
3420 By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3421 registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3422
3423 @item DWARF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3424 @findex DWARF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3425 Convert DWARF register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not defined,
3426 no conversion will be performed.
3427
3428 @item DWARF2_REG_TO_REGNUM
3429 @findex DWARF2_REG_TO_REGNUM
3430 Convert DWARF2 register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not
3431 defined, no conversion will be performed.
3432
3433 @item ECOFF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3434 @findex ECOFF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3435 Convert ECOFF register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not defined,
3436 no conversion will be performed.
3437
3438 @item END_OF_TEXT_DEFAULT
3439 @findex END_OF_TEXT_DEFAULT
3440 This is an expression that should designate the end of the text section.
3441 @c (? FIXME ?)
3442
3443 @item EXTRACT_RETURN_VALUE(@var{type}, @var{regbuf}, @var{valbuf})
3444 @findex EXTRACT_RETURN_VALUE
3445 Define this to extract a function's return value of type @var{type} from
3446 the raw register state @var{regbuf} and copy that, in virtual format,
3447 into @var{valbuf}.
3448
3449 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
3450 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
3451
3452 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS(@var{regbuf})
3453 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS
3454 @anchor{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}
3455 When defined, extract from the array @var{regbuf} (containing the raw
3456 register state) the @code{CORE_ADDR} at which a function should return
3457 its structure value.
3458
3459 @xref{gdbarch_return_value}.
3460
3461 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P()
3462 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P
3463 Predicate for @code{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}.
3464
3465 @item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3466 @findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3467 If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3468 macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3469
3470 This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3471 is not defined.
3472
3473 @item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3474 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3475 Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3476 represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3477 Otherwise return 0.
3478
3479 @item frame_align (@var{address})
3480 @anchor{frame_align}
3481 @findex frame_align
3482 Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3483 requirements for the start of a new stack frame. A stack frame's
3484 alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3485 stack alignment requirements (@pxref{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}).
3486
3487 This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3488 the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3489 value are correctly aligned.
3490
3491 Unlike @code{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}, this function always adjusts the
3492 address in the direction of stack growth.
3493
3494 By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3495
3496 @item int frame_red_zone_size
3497
3498 The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3499 @sc{abi}. A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3500 allocating extra stack space).
3501
3502 When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3503 modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3504 @var{frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3505 stack.
3506
3507 By default, zero bytes are allocated. The value must be aligned
3508 (@pxref{frame_align}).
3509
3510 The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3511 @emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3512 @cindex red zone
3513
3514 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3515 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3516 Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3517
3518 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3519 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3520 Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3521 outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise. Most normal
3522 situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3523 chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3524 startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3525 @code{_start}.
3526
3527 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3528 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3529 See @file{frame.h}. Determines the address of all registers in the
3530 current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}. Space for
3531 @code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3532 @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3533 @code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3534
3535 @code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3536
3537 @item FRAME_NUM_ARGS (@var{fi})
3538 @findex FRAME_NUM_ARGS
3539 For the frame described by @var{fi} return the number of arguments that
3540 are being passed. If the number of arguments is not known, return
3541 @code{-1}.
3542
3543 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3544 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3545 @anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3546 saved there. This is the return address.
3547
3548 This method is deprecated. @xref{unwind_pc}.
3549
3550 @item CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
3551 @findex unwind_pc
3552 @anchor{unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in @var{this_frame}'s
3553 caller, at which execution will resume after @var{this_frame} returns.
3554 This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3555
3556 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3557 is typically no more than:
3558
3559 @smallexample
3560 ULONGEST pc;
3561 frame_unwind_unsigned_register (this_frame, D10V_PC_REGNUM, &pc);
3562 return d10v_make_iaddr (pc);
3563 @end smallexample
3564
3565 @noindent
3566 @xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3567
3568 @item CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
3569 @findex unwind_sp
3570 @anchor{unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address. This is
3571 commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3572
3573 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3574 is typically no more than:
3575
3576 @smallexample
3577 ULONGEST sp;
3578 frame_unwind_unsigned_register (this_frame, D10V_SP_REGNUM, &sp);
3579 return d10v_make_daddr (sp);
3580 @end smallexample
3581
3582 @noindent
3583 @xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3584
3585 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3586 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3587 For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3588 function end symbol is 0. For such targets, you must define
3589 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3590 function's epilogue.
3591
3592 @item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3593 @findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3594 An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3595 used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3596 function's first genuine instruction.
3597
3598 This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3599 the address of its first instruction. However, on the VAX, for
3600 example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3601 indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function. The
3602 VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3603 appropriate registers automatically. Thus, since the offset from the
3604 function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3605 @code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3606
3607 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3608 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3609 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3610 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3611 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3612 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
3613 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3614 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3615
3616 @item @value{GDBN}_MULTI_ARCH
3617 @findex @value{GDBN}_MULTI_ARCH
3618 If defined and non-zero, enables support for multiple architectures
3619 within @value{GDBN}.
3620
3621 This support can be enabled at two levels. At level one, only
3622 definitions for previously undefined macros are provided; at level two,
3623 a multi-arch definition of all architecture dependent macros will be
3624 defined.
3625
3626 @item @value{GDBN}_TARGET_IS_HPPA
3627 @findex @value{GDBN}_TARGET_IS_HPPA
3628 This determines whether horrible kludge code in @file{dbxread.c} and
3629 @file{partial-stab.h} is used to mangle multiple-symbol-table files from
3630 HPPA's. This should all be ripped out, and a scheme like @file{elfread.c}
3631 used instead.
3632
3633 @item GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
3634 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
3635 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
3636 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3637 the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3638
3639 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3640 assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint. It takes a
3641 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3642 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3643
3644 @item DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER
3645 @findex DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER
3646 Define this if you need to supply your own definition for the function
3647 @code{DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER}.
3648
3649 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3650 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3651 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
3652 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3653 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in a haste and we are
3654 repenting at leisure.
3655
3656 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3657 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3658 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3659
3660 @item SYMBOLS_CAN_START_WITH_DOLLAR
3661 @findex SYMBOLS_CAN_START_WITH_DOLLAR
3662 Some systems have routines whose names start with @samp{$}. Giving this
3663 macro a non-zero value tells @value{GDBN}'s expression parser to check for such
3664 routines when parsing tokens that begin with @samp{$}.
3665
3666 On HP-UX, certain system routines (millicode) have names beginning with
3667 @samp{$} or @samp{$$}. For example, @code{$$dyncall} is a millicode
3668 routine that handles inter-space procedure calls on PA-RISC.
3669
3670 @item DEPRECATED_INIT_EXTRA_FRAME_INFO (@var{fromleaf}, @var{frame})
3671 @findex DEPRECATED_INIT_EXTRA_FRAME_INFO
3672 If additional information about the frame is required this should be
3673 stored in @code{frame->extra_info}. Space for @code{frame->extra_info}
3674 is allocated using @code{frame_extra_info_zalloc}.
3675
3676 @item DEPRECATED_INIT_FRAME_PC (@var{fromleaf}, @var{prev})
3677 @findex DEPRECATED_INIT_FRAME_PC
3678 This is a C statement that sets the pc of the frame pointed to by
3679 @var{prev}. [By default...]
3680
3681 @item INNER_THAN (@var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3682 @findex INNER_THAN
3683 Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3684 stack top) stack address @var{rhs}. Define this as @code{lhs < rhs} if
3685 the target's stack grows downward in memory, or @code{lhs > rsh} if the
3686 stack grows upward.
3687
3688 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc})
3689 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3690 Returns non-zero if the given @var{pc} is in the epilogue of a function.
3691 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3692 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3693 final `return from function call' instruction.
3694
3695 @item DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_START (@var{pc})
3696 @findex DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_START
3697 @itemx DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_END (@var{pc})
3698 @findex DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_END
3699 Define these to be the start and end address of the @code{sigtramp} for the
3700 given @var{pc}. On machines where the address is just a compile time
3701 constant, the macro expansion will typically just ignore the supplied
3702 @var{pc}.
3703
3704 @item IN_SOLIB_CALL_TRAMPOLINE (@var{pc}, @var{name})
3705 @findex IN_SOLIB_CALL_TRAMPOLINE
3706 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3707 trampoline that connects to a shared library.
3708
3709 @item IN_SOLIB_RETURN_TRAMPOLINE (@var{pc}, @var{name})
3710 @findex IN_SOLIB_RETURN_TRAMPOLINE
3711 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3712 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3713
3714 @item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3715 @findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3716 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3717 dynamic linker.
3718
3719 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3720 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3721 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3722 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3723 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3724 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3725 stepping will suffice.
3726
3727 @item INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS (@var{type}, @var{buf})
3728 @findex INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS
3729 @cindex converting integers to addresses
3730 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3731 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
3732 the current architectures conventions.
3733
3734 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3735 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3736 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3737 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
3738 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
3739 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3740 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
3741 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3742 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3743 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
3744 method like @code{INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS} certainly makes it possible for
3745 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3746
3747 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3748 Addresses}.
3749
3750 @item NO_HIF_SUPPORT
3751 @findex NO_HIF_SUPPORT
3752 (Specific to the a29k.)
3753
3754 @item POINTER_TO_ADDRESS (@var{type}, @var{buf})
3755 @findex POINTER_TO_ADDRESS
3756 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3757 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3758 address the pointer refers to.
3759 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3760
3761 @item REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (@var{reg})
3762 @findex REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE
3763 Return non-zero if @var{reg} uses different raw and virtual formats.
3764 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3765
3766 @item REGISTER_TO_VALUE(@var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3767 @findex REGISTER_TO_VALUE
3768 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3769 @var{type}.
3770 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3771
3772 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (@var{reg})
3773 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE
3774 Return the raw size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the register's
3775 virtual type.
3776 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3777
3778 @item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3779 @findex register_reggroup_p
3780 @cindex register groups
3781 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3782 group @var{reggroup}.
3783
3784 By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3785
3786 @table @code
3787 @item float_reggroup
3788 Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3789 @item vector_reggroup
3790 Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3791 @item general_reggroup
3792 Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3793 floating-point. @samp{float_reggroup}.
3794 @item save_reggroup
3795 @itemx restore_reggroup
3796 @itemx all_reggroup
3797 Any register with a valid name.
3798 @end table
3799
3800 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3801 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3802 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3803 register's virtual type.
3804 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3805 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3806
3807 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3808 @findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3809 Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3810 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3811
3812 @item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3813 @findex register_type
3814 If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}. This function
3815 supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}. @xref{Target Architecture
3816 Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3817
3818 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3819 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3820 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3821 form.
3822 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3823
3824 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3825 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3826 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3827 form.
3828 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3829
3830 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3831 @findex regset_from_core_section
3832 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3833 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3834
3835 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3836 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3837 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3838 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3839
3840 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3841 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3842 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3843 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3844 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3845 for examples.
3846
3847 @item SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3848 @findex SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3849 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3850 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3851 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3852 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3853 linking faster.
3854
3855 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} indicates that a particular set of
3856 hacks of this sort are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN}
3857 entries in stabs-format debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark
3858 the beginning and ending addresses of compilation units in the text
3859 segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs mark the starts and ends of functions.
3860
3861 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} means two things:
3862
3863 @itemize @bullet
3864 @item
3865 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead, you should find the
3866 addresses where the function starts by taking the function name from
3867 the stab, and then looking that up in the minsyms (the
3868 linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab has the
3869 name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place that carries
3870 the address.
3871
3872 @item
3873 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
3874 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab,
3875 and guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from
3876 them.
3877 @end itemize
3878
3879 @item PC_LOAD_SEGMENT
3880 @findex PC_LOAD_SEGMENT
3881 If defined, print information about the load segment for the program
3882 counter. (Defined only for the RS/6000.)
3883
3884 @item PC_REGNUM
3885 @findex PC_REGNUM
3886 If the program counter is kept in a register, then define this macro to
3887 be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3888
3889 This should only need to be defined if @code{TARGET_READ_PC} and
3890 @code{TARGET_WRITE_PC} are not defined.
3891
3892 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
3893 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
3894 If non-zero, round arguments to a boundary of this many bits before
3895 pushing them on the stack.
3896
3897 @item stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3898 @findex stabs_argument_has_addr
3899 @findex DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR
3900 @anchor{stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this to return nonzero if a
3901 function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference instead of
3902 value.
3903
3904 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}
3905 (@pxref{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}).
3906
3907 @item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3908 @findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3909 A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3910
3911 @item PROLOGUE_FIRSTLINE_OVERLAP
3912 @findex PROLOGUE_FIRSTLINE_OVERLAP
3913 (Only used in unsupported Convex configuration.)
3914
3915 @item PS_REGNUM
3916 @findex PS_REGNUM
3917 If defined, this is the number of the processor status register. (This
3918 definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3919
3920 @item DEPRECATED_POP_FRAME
3921 @findex DEPRECATED_POP_FRAME
3922 @findex frame_pop
3923 If defined, used by @code{frame_pop} to remove a stack frame. This
3924 method has been superseded by generic code.
3925
3926 @item push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{pc_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3927 @findex push_dummy_call
3928 @findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3929 @anchor{push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3930 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing
3931 @var{nargs}, the code should push @var{struct_addr} (when
3932 @var{struct_return}), and the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3933
3934 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3935 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3936
3937 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3938
3939 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3940
3941 @item CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr})
3942 @findex push_dummy_code
3943 @anchor{push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3944 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3945 called function should return.
3946
3947 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3948 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3949 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3950
3951 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3952 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3953 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3954
3955 This method replaces @code{CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION},
3956 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3957
3958 @item REGISTER_NAME(@var{i})
3959 @findex REGISTER_NAME
3960 Return the name of register @var{i} as a string. May return @code{NULL}
3961 or @code{NUL} to indicate that register @var{i} is not valid.
3962
3963 @item DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
3964 @findex DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR
3965 @anchor{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}Define this to return 1 if the
3966 given type will be passed by pointer rather than directly.
3967
3968 This method has been replaced by @code{stabs_argument_has_addr}
3969 (@pxref{stabs_argument_has_addr}).
3970
3971 @item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3972 @findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3973 @anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3974 notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3975 passed to the inferior code. This is the value of the @code{SP}
3976 after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3977 allocated on the stack. @xref{unwind_dummy_id}.
3978
3979 @item SDB_REG_TO_REGNUM
3980 @findex SDB_REG_TO_REGNUM
3981 Define this to convert sdb register numbers into @value{GDBN} regnums. If not
3982 defined, no conversion will be done.
3983
3984 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3985 @findex gdbarch_return_value
3986 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3987 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3988 would use.
3989
3990 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3991 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3992 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3993 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3994 passed in as the function's first parameter.
3995
3996 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
3997 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
3998 @var{regcache}.
3999
4000 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4001 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4002 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4003 just returned function).
4004
4005 @xref{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}, for a description of how
4006 return-values that use the struct convention are handled.
4007
4008 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4009 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4010 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
4011 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4012 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4013 return-value extract and store.}
4014
4015 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4016 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
4017 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4018 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4019 @var{function} should be pursued.}
4020
4021 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4022 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4023 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4024 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4025
4026 @item SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT
4027 @findex SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT
4028 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
4029 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4030 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
4031 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4032 doesn't work. Calling @code{SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT} adjusts the processor's
4033 state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint. This
4034 macro does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4035 of a branch or jump.
4036
4037 @item SKIP_PROLOGUE (@var{pc})
4038 @findex SKIP_PROLOGUE
4039 A C expression that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
4040 function entry prologue found at @var{pc}.
4041
4042 @item SKIP_TRAMPOLINE_CODE (@var{pc})
4043 @findex SKIP_TRAMPOLINE_CODE
4044 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4045 the functions being called, then define this macro to return a new PC
4046 that is at the start of the real function.
4047
4048 @item SP_REGNUM
4049 @findex SP_REGNUM
4050 If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then define this macro to be
4051 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
4052 there is no such register.
4053
4054 @item STAB_REG_TO_REGNUM
4055 @findex STAB_REG_TO_REGNUM
4056 Define this to convert stab register numbers (as gotten from `r'
4057 declarations) into @value{GDBN} regnums. If not defined, no conversion will be
4058 done.
4059
4060 @item DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN (@var{addr})
4061 @anchor{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}
4062 @findex DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN
4063 Define this to increase @var{addr} so that it meets the alignment
4064 requirements for the processor's stack.
4065
4066 Unlike @ref{frame_align}, this function always adjusts @var{addr}
4067 upwards.
4068
4069 By default, no stack alignment is performed.
4070
4071 @item STEP_SKIPS_DELAY (@var{addr})
4072 @findex STEP_SKIPS_DELAY
4073 Define this to return true if the address is of an instruction with a
4074 delay slot. If a breakpoint has been placed in the instruction's delay
4075 slot, @value{GDBN} will single-step over that instruction before resuming
4076 normally. Currently only defined for the Mips.
4077
4078 @item STORE_RETURN_VALUE (@var{type}, @var{regcache}, @var{valbuf})
4079 @findex STORE_RETURN_VALUE
4080 A C expression that writes the function return value, found in
4081 @var{valbuf}, into the @var{regcache}. @var{type} is the type of the
4082 value that is to be returned.
4083
4084 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4085 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4086
4087 @item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4088 @findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4089 The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable. (Never defined in
4090 current sources.)
4091
4092 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4093 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4094 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4095
4096 @item TARGET_CHAR_SIGNED
4097 @findex TARGET_CHAR_SIGNED
4098 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4099 it should be unsigned.
4100
4101 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4102 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4103 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4104 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4105 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4106
4107 @item TARGET_COMPLEX_BIT
4108 @findex TARGET_COMPLEX_BIT
4109 Number of bits in a complex number; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_FLOAT_BIT}.
4110
4111 At present this macro is not used.
4112
4113 @item TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT
4114 @findex TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT
4115 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4116
4117 @item TARGET_DOUBLE_COMPLEX_BIT
4118 @findex TARGET_DOUBLE_COMPLEX_BIT
4119 Number of bits in a double complex; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT}.
4120
4121 At present this macro is not used.
4122
4123 @item TARGET_FLOAT_BIT
4124 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_BIT
4125 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4126
4127 @item TARGET_INT_BIT
4128 @findex TARGET_INT_BIT
4129 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4130
4131 @item TARGET_LONG_BIT
4132 @findex TARGET_LONG_BIT
4133 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4134
4135 @item TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_BIT
4136 @findex TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_BIT
4137 Number of bits in a long double float;
4138 defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT}.
4139
4140 @item TARGET_LONG_LONG_BIT
4141 @findex TARGET_LONG_LONG_BIT
4142 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_LONG_BIT}.
4143
4144 @item TARGET_PTR_BIT
4145 @findex TARGET_PTR_BIT
4146 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to @code{TARGET_INT_BIT}.
4147
4148 @item TARGET_SHORT_BIT
4149 @findex TARGET_SHORT_BIT
4150 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4151
4152 @item TARGET_READ_PC
4153 @findex TARGET_READ_PC
4154 @itemx TARGET_WRITE_PC (@var{val}, @var{pid})
4155 @findex TARGET_WRITE_PC
4156 @anchor{TARGET_WRITE_PC}
4157 @itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4158 @findex TARGET_READ_SP
4159 @itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4160 @findex TARGET_READ_FP
4161 @findex read_pc
4162 @findex write_pc
4163 @findex read_sp
4164 @findex read_fp
4165 @anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{read_pc},
4166 @code{write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}. For most targets, these may be
4167 left undefined. @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4168 functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4169
4170 These macros are useful when a target keeps one of these registers in a
4171 hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register and part
4172 in an ordinary register.
4173
4174 @xref{unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4175
4176 @item TARGET_VIRTUAL_FRAME_POINTER(@var{pc}, @var{regp}, @var{offsetp})
4177 @findex TARGET_VIRTUAL_FRAME_POINTER
4178 Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4179 pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame pointers
4180 are not used, a default definition simply returns
4181 @code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4182
4183 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4184 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4185 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4186 other related macros.
4187
4188 @item TARGET_PRINT_INSN (@var{addr}, @var{info})
4189 @findex TARGET_PRINT_INSN
4190 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4191 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{addr} in
4192 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes. If
4193 a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4194 accessor function for the global pointer
4195 @code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}. This usually points to a function in
4196 the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4197 @var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4198 @file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4199 decoding routine.
4200
4201 @item struct frame_id unwind_dummy_id (struct frame_info *@var{frame})
4202 @findex unwind_dummy_id
4203 @anchor{unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @code{struct
4204 frame_id} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4205 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4206 previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4207 @xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4208
4209 @item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4210 @findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4211 If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4212 given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4213 allocated for it on the stack. @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4214 being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4215 for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4216 other compilers.
4217
4218 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4219 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4220
4221 @item VALUE_TO_REGISTER(@var{type}, @var{regnum}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4222 @findex VALUE_TO_REGISTER
4223 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of register
4224 @var{regnum}'s.
4225 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4226
4227 @item VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK (@var{desc}, @var{gcc_p})
4228 @findex VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK
4229 For dbx-style debugging information, if the compiler puts variable
4230 declarations inside LBRAC/RBRAC blocks, this should be defined to be
4231 nonzero. @var{desc} is the value of @code{n_desc} from the
4232 @code{N_RBRAC} symbol, and @var{gcc_p} is true if @value{GDBN} has noticed the
4233 presence of either the @code{GCC_COMPILED_SYMBOL} or the
4234 @code{GCC2_COMPILED_SYMBOL}. By default, this is 0.
4235
4236 @item OS9K_VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK (@var{desc}, @var{gcc_p})
4237 @findex OS9K_VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK
4238 Similarly, for OS/9000. Defaults to 1.
4239 @end table
4240
4241 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4242
4243 @ftable @code
4244 @item BPT_VECTOR
4245 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
4246 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4247
4248 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4249 Defaults to @code{1}.
4250
4251 @item NAME_OF_MALLOC
4252 @findex NAME_OF_MALLOC
4253 A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4254 allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4255
4256 @end ftable
4257
4258 @section Adding a New Target
4259
4260 @cindex adding a target
4261 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4262
4263 @table @file
4264 @vindex TDEPFILES
4265 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4266 Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target. Specifies what
4267 object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4268 @samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}. Also specifies
4269 the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4270 tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4271
4272 You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4273 but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4274 future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4275
4276 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4277 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
4278 some machines it doesn't exist at all. Sometimes the macros in
4279 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4280 as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4281 function. This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4282 and debug.
4283
4284 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4285 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4286 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4287 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4288 @file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use
4289 the same processor.
4290
4291 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4292 (@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains
4293 macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4294 format and instructions.
4295
4296 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4297
4298 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4299 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4300 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4301 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use the
4302 same processor.
4303
4304 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4305
4306 @end table
4307
4308 If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4309 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4310 facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4311 instruction needed; etc.). Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4312 that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4313 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4314
4315
4316 @section Converting an existing Target Architecture to Multi-arch
4317 @cindex converting targets to multi-arch
4318
4319 This section describes the current accepted best practice for converting
4320 an existing target architecture to the multi-arch framework.
4321
4322 The process consists of generating, testing, posting and committing a
4323 sequence of patches. Each patch must contain a single change, for
4324 instance:
4325
4326 @itemize @bullet
4327
4328 @item
4329 Directly convert a group of functions into macros (the conversion does
4330 not change the behavior of any of the functions).
4331
4332 @item
4333 Replace a non-multi-arch with a multi-arch mechanism (e.g.,
4334 @code{FRAME_INFO}).
4335
4336 @item
4337 Enable multi-arch level one.
4338
4339 @item
4340 Delete one or more files.
4341
4342 @end itemize
4343
4344 @noindent
4345 There isn't a size limit on a patch, however, a developer is strongly
4346 encouraged to keep the patch size down.
4347
4348 Since each patch is well defined, and since each change has been tested
4349 and shows no regressions, the patches are considered @emph{fairly}
4350 obvious. Such patches, when submitted by developers listed in the
4351 @file{MAINTAINERS} file, do not need approval. Occasional steps in the
4352 process may be more complicated and less clear. The developer is
4353 expected to use their judgment and is encouraged to seek advice as
4354 needed.
4355
4356 @subsection Preparation
4357
4358 The first step is to establish control. Build (with @option{-Werror}
4359 enabled) and test the target so that there is a baseline against which
4360 the debugger can be compared.
4361
4362 At no stage can the test results regress or @value{GDBN} stop compiling
4363 with @option{-Werror}.
4364
4365 @subsection Add the multi-arch initialization code
4366
4367 The objective of this step is to establish the basic multi-arch
4368 framework. It involves
4369
4370 @itemize @bullet
4371
4372 @item
4373 The addition of a @code{@var{arch}_gdbarch_init} function@footnote{The
4374 above is from the original example and uses K&R C. @value{GDBN}
4375 has since converted to ISO C but lets ignore that.} that creates
4376 the architecture:
4377 @smallexample
4378 static struct gdbarch *
4379 d10v_gdbarch_init (info, arches)
4380 struct gdbarch_info info;
4381 struct gdbarch_list *arches;
4382 @{
4383 struct gdbarch *gdbarch;
4384 /* there is only one d10v architecture */
4385 if (arches != NULL)
4386 return arches->gdbarch;
4387 gdbarch = gdbarch_alloc (&info, NULL);
4388 return gdbarch;
4389 @}
4390 @end smallexample
4391 @noindent
4392 @emph{}
4393
4394 @item
4395 A per-architecture dump function to print any architecture specific
4396 information:
4397 @smallexample
4398 static void
4399 mips_dump_tdep (struct gdbarch *current_gdbarch,
4400 struct ui_file *file)
4401 @{
4402 @dots{} code to print architecture specific info @dots{}
4403 @}
4404 @end smallexample
4405
4406 @item
4407 A change to @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} to register this new
4408 architecture:
4409 @smallexample
4410 void
4411 _initialize_mips_tdep (void)
4412 @{
4413 gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_mips, mips_gdbarch_init,
4414 mips_dump_tdep);
4415 @end smallexample
4416
4417 @item
4418 Add the macro @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH}, defined as 0 (zero), to the file@*
4419 @file{config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}.
4420
4421 @end itemize
4422
4423 @subsection Update multi-arch incompatible mechanisms
4424
4425 Some mechanisms do not work with multi-arch. They include:
4426
4427 @table @code
4428 @item FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS
4429 Replaced with @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS}
4430 @end table
4431
4432 @noindent
4433 At this stage you could also consider converting the macros into
4434 functions.
4435
4436 @subsection Prepare for multi-arch level to one
4437
4438 Temporally set @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH} to @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH_PARTIAL}
4439 and then build and start @value{GDBN} (the change should not be
4440 committed). @value{GDBN} may not build, and once built, it may die with
4441 an internal error listing the architecture methods that must be
4442 provided.
4443
4444 Fix any build problems (patch(es)).
4445
4446 Convert all the architecture methods listed, which are only macros, into
4447 functions (patch(es)).
4448
4449 Update @code{@var{arch}_gdbarch_init} to set all the missing
4450 architecture methods and wrap the corresponding macros in @code{#if
4451 !GDB_MULTI_ARCH} (patch(es)).
4452
4453 @subsection Set multi-arch level one
4454
4455 Change the value of @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH} to GDB_MULTI_ARCH_PARTIAL (a
4456 single patch).
4457
4458 Any problems with throwing ``the switch'' should have been fixed
4459 already.
4460
4461 @subsection Convert remaining macros
4462
4463 Suggest converting macros into functions (and setting the corresponding
4464 architecture method) in small batches.
4465
4466 @subsection Set multi-arch level to two
4467
4468 This should go smoothly.
4469
4470 @subsection Delete the TM file
4471
4472 The @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} can be deleted. @file{@var{arch}.mt} and
4473 @file{configure.in} updated.
4474
4475
4476 @node Target Descriptions
4477 @chapter Target Descriptions
4478 @cindex target descriptions
4479
4480 The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
4481 contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture. For
4482 some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
4483 instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
4484 @dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
4485 more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
4486 directly.
4487
4488 For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
4489 target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
4490 Debugging with @value{GDBN}}. This section will cover some related
4491 topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
4492
4493 @menu
4494 * Target Descriptions Implementation::
4495 * Adding Target Described Register Support::
4496 @end menu
4497
4498 @node Target Descriptions Implementation
4499 @section Target Descriptions Implementation
4500 @cindex target descriptions, implementation
4501
4502 Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
4503 an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
4504 reverts to a default gdbarch. Then, after connecting, it looks for a
4505 new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
4506
4507 A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
4508 @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
4509 @code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector. For instance,
4510 the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
4511 64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
4512
4513 If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
4514 incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}. Any
4515 @samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
4516 architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
4517 new architecture. Then the initialization routine is called, and has
4518 a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
4519 of the target description. For instance, it can recognize any
4520 properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine. Also
4521 see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
4522
4523 @node Adding Target Described Register Support
4524 @section Adding Target Described Register Support
4525 @cindex target descriptions, adding register support
4526
4527 Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
4528 instance of the target. But it takes a little work in the architecture
4529 specific routines to support this.
4530
4531 A target description must either have no registers or a complete
4532 set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
4533 with the target defined registers. It is the architecture's
4534 responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
4535 everything it needs. To keep architecture code simple, the same
4536 mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
4537 standard registers.
4538
4539 If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
4540 registers. The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
4541
4542 @itemize @bullet
4543
4544 @item
4545 Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
4546 searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
4547
4548 @item
4549 Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
4550
4551 @item
4552 Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
4553 to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
4554
4555 @item
4556 Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
4557 feature is missing expected registers. This will produce a warning that
4558 the description was incomplete.
4559
4560 @item
4561 Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
4562 is called.
4563
4564 @item
4565 Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
4566 fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
4567
4568 @item
4569 Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
4570 returning it.
4571
4572 @end itemize
4573
4574 After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
4575 @code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
4576 routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
4577 the target description. @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
4578 for any additional registers in the description.
4579
4580 Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
4581
4582 @itemize @bullet
4583
4584 @item
4585 Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
4586 constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
4587 as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}. But because
4588 pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
4589 which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
4590 can not be used for pseudos. They must be numbered relative to
4591 @code{num_regs} instead.
4592
4593 @item
4594 The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
4595 architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
4596 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
4597 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
4598 describing pseudo registers. These routines will be passed
4599 internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
4600 gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
4601
4602 @end itemize
4603
4604
4605 @node Target Vector Definition
4606
4607 @chapter Target Vector Definition
4608 @cindex target vector
4609
4610 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4611 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4612 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4613 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4614 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4615
4616 @menu
4617 * Managing Execution State::
4618 * Existing Targets::
4619 @end menu
4620
4621 @node Managing Execution State
4622 @section Managing Execution State
4623 @cindex execution state
4624
4625 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4626 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4627 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4628 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4629 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4630 when the target has exited or not yet started.
4631
4632 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4633 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
4634 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4635 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4636 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4637 are directed to the simulator.
4638
4639 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4640 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4641 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4642 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4643
4644 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4645 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4646 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
4647 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4648 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4649 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4650 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4651 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4652 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4653 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
4654 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4655 target to inactive state.
4656
4657 @node Existing Targets
4658 @section Existing Targets
4659 @cindex targets
4660
4661 @subsection File Targets
4662
4663 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4664
4665 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4666
4667 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4668 that runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4669 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4670 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4671
4672 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4673 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4674 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4675 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4676
4677 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4678 @code{trap_low}:
4679
4680 @enumerate
4681 @item
4682 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4683
4684 @item
4685 traps are disabled;
4686
4687 @item
4688 you are in the correct trap window.
4689 @end enumerate
4690
4691 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4692 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4693 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4694 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4695 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
4696 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4697 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4698
4699 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4700 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4701 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
4702 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
4703 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
4704 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4705 of the debugger/stub.
4706
4707 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4708 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4709
4710 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4711
4712 @subsection Custom Protocols
4713
4714 @subsection Transport Layer
4715
4716 @subsection Builtin Simulator
4717
4718
4719 @node Native Debugging
4720
4721 @chapter Native Debugging
4722 @cindex native debugging
4723
4724 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4725
4726 @table @file
4727 @vindex NATDEPFILES
4728 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4729 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4730 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
4731 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4732 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4733 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
4734 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4735 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4736
4737 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4738 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4739 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
4740 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
4741 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4742 suffix.}
4743
4744 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4745 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
4746 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4747 child process control and core file support.
4748
4749 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4750 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4751 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4752 @end table
4753
4754 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4755 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
4756 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
4757 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4758 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4759
4760 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4761 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4762 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4763 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4764
4765 @table @file
4766 @item inftarg.c
4767 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4768 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4769
4770 @item procfs.c
4771 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4772 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4773
4774 @item fork-child.c
4775 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4776 and exec'' to start up a child process.
4777
4778 @item infptrace.c
4779 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4780 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4781 @end table
4782
4783 @section Native core file Support
4784 @cindex native core files
4785
4786 @table @file
4787 @findex fetch_core_registers
4788 @item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4789 Support for reading registers out of a core file. This routine calls
4790 @code{register_addr()}, see below. Now that BFD is used to read core
4791 files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4792 just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4793 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4794
4795 @item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4796 If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4797 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4798 set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4799 register number @code{regno}. @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4800 ``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}. If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4801 @file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4802 use the macro in it. If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4803 you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4804 to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4805 @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4806 the @code{NATDEPFILES} list. If you have your own
4807 @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4808 @code{register_addr()}. Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4809 implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4810 @end table
4811
4812 When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4813 possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4814 code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4815 @file{bfd/trad-core.c}. First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4816 machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4817 (possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4818 @file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4819 exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}). Then
4820 modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4821 section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4822 segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4823 information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4824 sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment. This
4825 section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4826 standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4827 around in.
4828
4829 Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4830 @code{fetch_core_registers}. If you can use the generic one, it's in
4831 @file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4832 It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4833 its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4834 segment, its length, and a 2. The routine should suck out the supplied
4835 register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4836
4837 If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4838 format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4839 reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4840
4841 @section ptrace
4842
4843 @section /proc
4844
4845 @section win32
4846
4847 @section shared libraries
4848
4849 @section Native Conditionals
4850 @cindex native conditionals
4851
4852 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4853 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4854 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
4855 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4856
4857 @table @code
4858
4859 @item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4860 @findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4861 If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4862 define this to ensure that all values are correct. This usually entails
4863 a read from the child.
4864
4865 [Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4866 currently.]
4867
4868 @item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4869 @findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4870 Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4871 @code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4872 @file{@var{host}-nat.c}. If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4873 @file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4874 routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4875
4876 @item FP0_REGNUM
4877 @findex FP0_REGNUM
4878 This macro is normally defined to be the number of the first floating
4879 point register, if the machine has such registers. As such, it would
4880 appear only in target-specific code. However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4881 to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4882
4883 @item GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
4884 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
4885 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
4886 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4887 @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4888
4889 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4890 assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint. It takes a
4891 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4892 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4893
4894 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4895 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4896 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4897
4898 @item KERNEL_U_ADDR
4899 @findex KERNEL_U_ADDR
4900 Define this to the address of the @code{u} structure (the ``user
4901 struct'', also known as the ``u-page'') in kernel virtual memory. @value{GDBN}
4902 needs to know this so that it can subtract this address from absolute
4903 addresses in the upage, that are obtained via ptrace or from core files.
4904 On systems that don't need this value, set it to zero.
4905
4906 @item KERNEL_U_ADDR_HPUX
4907 @findex KERNEL_U_ADDR_HPUX
4908 Define this to cause @value{GDBN} to determine the address of @code{u} at
4909 runtime, by using HP-style @code{nlist} on the kernel's image in the
4910 root directory.
4911
4912 @item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4913 @findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4914 Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4915 user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4916
4917 @item PROC_NAME_FMT
4918 @findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4919 Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device. Should be
4920 defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4921 definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4922
4923 @item REGISTER_U_ADDR
4924 @findex REGISTER_U_ADDR
4925 Defines the offset of the registers in the ``u area''.
4926
4927 @item SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4928 @findex SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4929 If defined, is a string to prefix on the shell command used to start the
4930 inferior.
4931
4932 @item SHELL_FILE
4933 @findex SHELL_FILE
4934 If defined, this is the name of the shell to use to run the inferior.
4935 Defaults to @code{"/bin/sh"}.
4936
4937 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4938 @findex SOLIB_ADD
4939 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4940 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4941 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4942 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4943
4944 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4945 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4946 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4947 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4948
4949 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4950 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4951 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4952 twice; once when
4953 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
4954 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4955 expand into the number expected.
4956
4957 @item U_REGS_OFFSET
4958 @findex U_REGS_OFFSET
4959 This is the offset of the registers in the upage. It need only be
4960 defined if the generic ptrace register access routines in
4961 @file{infptrace.c} are being used (that is, @file{infptrace.c} is
4962 configured in, and @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined). If
4963 the default value from @file{infptrace.c} is good enough, leave it
4964 undefined.
4965
4966 The default value means that u.u_ar0 @emph{points to} the location of
4967 the registers. I'm guessing that @code{#define U_REGS_OFFSET 0} means
4968 that @code{u.u_ar0} @emph{is} the location of the registers.
4969
4970 @item CLEAR_SOLIB
4971 @findex CLEAR_SOLIB
4972 See @file{objfiles.c}.
4973
4974 @item DEBUG_PTRACE
4975 @findex DEBUG_PTRACE
4976 Define this to debug @code{ptrace} calls.
4977 @end table
4978
4979
4980 @node Support Libraries
4981
4982 @chapter Support Libraries
4983
4984 @section BFD
4985 @cindex BFD library
4986
4987 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4988
4989 @table @emph
4990 @item identifying executable and core files
4991 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4992 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4993
4994 @item access to sections of files
4995 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4996 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4997 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
4998 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4999 length @var{z}.
5000
5001 @item specialized core file support
5002 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5003 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5004 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5005 file.
5006
5007 @item locating the symbol information
5008 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5009 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
5010 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5011 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5012 string table, etc.
5013 @end table
5014
5015 @section opcodes
5016 @cindex opcodes library
5017
5018 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
5019 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5020
5021 @section readline
5022 @cindex readline library
5023 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5024 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5025
5026 @section libiberty
5027 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
5028
5029 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5030 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5031 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5032 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5033 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5034 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5035 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5036 beyond standard functions).
5037
5038 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5039 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5040 floating format support functions, the input options parser
5041 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5042
5043 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5044 @cindex @code{obstacks}
5045
5046 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5047 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5048 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5049 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5050 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5051 @code{obstacks}).
5052
5053 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5054 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
5055 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
5056 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5057 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5058 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5059 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5060 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5061 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5062 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
5063 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5064 names of types.
5065
5066 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5067 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5068 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5069 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
5070 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5071 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5072 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
5073 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5074 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5075 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5076 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
5077 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5078 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5079 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
5080 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5081
5082 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
5083 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5084 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5085 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5086 new symbol file.
5087
5088 @section gnu-regex
5089 @cindex regular expressions library
5090
5091 Regex conditionals.
5092
5093 @table @code
5094 @item C_ALLOCA
5095
5096 @item NFAILURES
5097
5098 @item RE_NREGS
5099
5100 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5101
5102 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5103
5104 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
5105
5106 @item Sword
5107
5108 @item sparc
5109 @end table
5110
5111 @section Array Containers
5112 @cindex Array Containers
5113 @cindex VEC
5114
5115 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5116 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5117 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5118 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
5119 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5120 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5121
5122 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5123 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5124 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5125 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5126 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
5127 but implemented in C.
5128
5129 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5130 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5131 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5132 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5133 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5134 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
5135 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5136 elements are returned by value.
5137
5138 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
5139 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5140 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
5141 the address-of can be optimized away.
5142
5143 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5144 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5145 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5146 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
5147 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
5148 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5149 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5150 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
5151 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5152 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5153 minimal space in the structure containing them.
5154
5155 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5156 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
5157 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5158 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5159 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5160 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5161 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5162 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
5163 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5164 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5165 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5166 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
5167 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5168
5169 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5170 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
5171 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
5172 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5173 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5174 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5175 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
5176 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
5177 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5178 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5179
5180 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5181 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
5182 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5183 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5184
5185 Vector types are defined using a
5186 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
5187 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
5188 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5189 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5190 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5191 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
5192 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5193 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5194 that is not possible in plain C.
5195
5196 An example of their use would be,
5197
5198 @smallexample
5199 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
5200
5201 struct my_struct @{
5202 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5203 @};
5204
5205 struct my_struct *s;
5206
5207 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5208 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5209 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5210 @{ do something with elt @}
5211
5212 @end smallexample
5213
5214 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5215 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
5216
5217 @table @code
5218 @item VEC_length
5219 Return the number of items in the array,
5220
5221 @item VEC_empty
5222 Return true if the array has no elements.
5223
5224 @item VEC_last
5225 @itemx VEC_index
5226 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5227
5228 @item VEC_iterate
5229 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5230 traversed.
5231
5232 @item VEC_alloc
5233 @itemx VEC_free
5234 Create and destroy an array.
5235
5236 @item VEC_embedded_size
5237 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
5238 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5239
5240 @item VEC_copy
5241 Duplicate an array.
5242
5243 @item VEC_space
5244 Return the amount of free space in an array.
5245
5246 @item VEC_reserve
5247 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5248
5249 @item VEC_quick_push
5250 @itemx VEC_safe_push
5251 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5252 sure that it is.
5253
5254 @item VEC_pop
5255 Remove the last item from an array.
5256
5257 @item VEC_truncate
5258 Remove several items from the end of an array.
5259
5260 @item VEC_safe_grow
5261 Add several items to the end of an array.
5262
5263 @item VEC_replace
5264 Overwrite an item in the array.
5265
5266 @item VEC_quick_insert
5267 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
5268 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
5269 already exist, or the space is created.
5270
5271 @item VEC_ordered_remove
5272 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5273 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5274
5275 @item VEC_block_remove
5276 Remove a set of items from the array.
5277
5278 @item VEC_address
5279 Provide the address of the first element.
5280
5281 @item VEC_lower_bound
5282 Binary search the array.
5283
5284 @end table
5285
5286 @section include
5287
5288 @node Coding
5289
5290 @chapter Coding
5291
5292 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5293 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5294
5295 @section Cleanups
5296 @cindex cleanups
5297
5298 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5299 later.
5300
5301 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5302 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5303 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
5304 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5305 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5306 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5307 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5308 created.
5309
5310 Syntax:
5311
5312 @table @code
5313 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5314 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5315
5316 @findex make_cleanup
5317 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5318 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5319 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5320 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5321 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
5322 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5323 from @code{make_cleanup}.
5324
5325 @findex do_cleanups
5326 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5327 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5328 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5329
5330 @findex discard_cleanups
5331 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5332 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5333 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5334 @end table
5335
5336 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
5337 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5338 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5339 performed). E.g.:
5340
5341 @smallexample
5342 make_cleanup (a, 0);
5343 @{
5344 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5345 make_cleanup (c, 0)
5346 ...
5347 do_cleanups (old);
5348 @}
5349 @end smallexample
5350
5351 @noindent
5352 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
5353 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5354 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5355
5356 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5357 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5358 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
5359 to two common cleanup styles.
5360
5361 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5362 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5363 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
5364 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5365 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5366 @code{xfree} will always be called:
5367
5368 @smallexample
5369 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5370 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5371 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5372 ... blah blah ...
5373 do_cleanups (old);
5374 @end smallexample
5375
5376 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5377 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5378 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
5379 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5380 an error:
5381
5382 @smallexample
5383 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5384 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5385 ... blah blah ...
5386 discard_cleanups (old);
5387 return file;
5388 @end smallexample
5389
5390 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5391 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
5392 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5393 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5394 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5395 @samp{longjmp} instead).
5396
5397 @section Per-architecture module data
5398 @cindex per-architecture module data
5399 @cindex multi-arch data
5400 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5401
5402 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5403 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5404 architecture object.
5405
5406 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5407
5408 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5409 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5410 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5411 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5412 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5413 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5414 @end deftypefun
5415
5416 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5417 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5418 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
5419 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5420 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5421 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5422 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5423 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5424 @end deftypefun
5425
5426 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5427 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5428
5429 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5430
5431 @deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5432 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5433 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5434 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5435 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
5436 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5437 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5438 @end deftypefun
5439
5440 The examples below assume the following definitions:
5441
5442 @smallexample
5443 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5444 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5445 @end smallexample
5446
5447 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5448 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
5449 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5450 creation.
5451
5452 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
5453 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5454 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5455
5456 @smallexample
5457 static void *
5458 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5459 @{
5460 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5461 return data;
5462 @}
5463 @end smallexample
5464
5465 @smallexample
5466 extern void
5467 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5468 @{
5469 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5470 data->total = nozel;
5471 @}
5472 @end smallexample
5473
5474 A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5475 using @code{post_init}.
5476
5477 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5478 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5479 architecture.
5480
5481 @smallexample
5482 static void *
5483 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5484 @{
5485 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5486 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5487 return data;
5488 @}
5489 @end smallexample
5490
5491 @smallexample
5492 extern int
5493 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5494 @{
5495 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5496 return data->total;
5497 @}
5498 @end smallexample
5499
5500 @section Wrapping Output Lines
5501 @cindex line wrap in output
5502
5503 @findex wrap_here
5504 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5505 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5506 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
5507 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5508 exceeded.
5509
5510 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5511 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
5512 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
5513 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5514 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
5515 return!
5516
5517 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5518 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5519 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5520 the line wraps there.
5521
5522 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5523 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5524 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
5525 print warnings are a good example.
5526
5527 @section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5528 @cindex coding standards
5529
5530 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5531 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5532 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5533 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5534 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5535
5536 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5537 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5538
5539
5540 @subsection ISO C
5541
5542 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5543 compiler.
5544
5545 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5546
5547
5548 @subsection Memory Management
5549
5550 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5551 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5552
5553 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5554 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5555 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
5556 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
5557 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5558
5559 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5560 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
5561 behavior.}
5562
5563 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5564
5565 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5566 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5567 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5568
5569 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5570 @code{NULL} pointer.}
5571
5572 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5573 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5574
5575 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
5576 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5577
5578 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5579 function @code{xstrprintf}.
5580
5581 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
5582 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5583 errors.}
5584
5585
5586 @subsection Compiler Warnings
5587 @cindex compiler warnings
5588
5589 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5590 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
5591 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
5592 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5593
5594 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5595 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
5596 from those flags are treated as errors.
5597
5598 The current list of warning flags includes:
5599
5600 @table @samp
5601 @item -Wall
5602 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5603
5604 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5605
5606 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5607 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5608
5609 @item -Wpointer-arith
5610
5611 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
5612 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5613 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5614 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5615 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5616 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5617
5618 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
5619 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5620 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5621 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5622 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
5623 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5624 worth the time it would take.
5625
5626 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
5627 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5628 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
5629 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5630 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5631 is being used.
5632
5633 @item -Wno-unused
5634 @itemx -Wno-switch
5635 @itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
5636 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5637 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5638
5639 @end table
5640
5641 @subsection Formatting
5642
5643 @cindex source code formatting
5644 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5645 strictly.
5646
5647 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5648 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5649
5650 @smallexample
5651 /* Declaration */
5652 static void foo (void);
5653 /* Definition */
5654 void
5655 foo (void)
5656 @{
5657 @}
5658 @end smallexample
5659
5660 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5661 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5662
5663 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5664 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5665 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5666 or before a close paren/bracket.
5667
5668 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5669 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5670 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5671 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5672 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5673
5674 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5675
5676 @smallexample
5677 void *foo;
5678 @end smallexample
5679
5680 @noindent
5681 and not:
5682
5683 @smallexample
5684 void * foo;
5685 void* foo;
5686 @end smallexample
5687
5688 @subsection Comments
5689
5690 @cindex comment formatting
5691 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5692
5693 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5694 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5695
5696 @smallexample
5697 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5698 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5699 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5700 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5701 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5702 @end smallexample
5703
5704 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5705 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5706
5707 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5708 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5709
5710 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5711 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5712 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5713 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5714
5715 @subsection C Usage
5716
5717 @cindex C data types
5718 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5719 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5720 of evaluation of expressions.
5721
5722 @cindex function usage
5723 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5724 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5725 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5726 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5727
5728 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5729 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5730
5731 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5732 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5733 protected with parentheses.)
5734
5735 @cindex types
5736
5737 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5738 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5739
5740
5741 @subsection Function Prototypes
5742 @cindex function prototypes
5743
5744 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5745 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5746 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5747 function definition.
5748
5749 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5750 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5751 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5752 visible to random source files.
5753
5754 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5755 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5756
5757
5758 @subsection Internal Error Recovery
5759
5760 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5761 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
5762 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5763 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5764 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5765 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5766
5767 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5768 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5769
5770 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5771
5772 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
5773 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5774 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5775 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5776
5777 @subsection File Names
5778
5779 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5780 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5781 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5782
5783 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5784 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5785 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5786 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5787 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5788 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5789 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5790
5791 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5792 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5793
5794 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5795
5796 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5797 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5798 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5799 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5800 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5801 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5802 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5803
5804 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5805
5806
5807 @subsection Include Files
5808
5809 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5810
5811 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5812 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5813 indirect inclusion.
5814
5815 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5816 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5817 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5818 be directly included.
5819
5820 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5821
5822 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5823 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5824 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5825
5826 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5827
5828 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5829 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5830 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5831
5832 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5833
5834 @smallexample
5835 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5836 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5837 header body
5838 #endif
5839 @end smallexample
5840
5841
5842 @subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5843
5844 @cindex design
5845 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5846 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5847 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5848 trouble.
5849
5850 @cindex assumptions about targets
5851 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5852 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
5853 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5854 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5855 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5856
5857 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5858 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
5859 current @code{target_ops} vector.
5860
5861 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5862 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
5863 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5864 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
5865 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5866 copyright problems.
5867
5868 @cindex portability
5869 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
5870 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5871 systems.
5872
5873 @cindex system dependencies
5874 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5875 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5876 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
5877 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
5878 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5879 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5880 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5881 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5882 with regard to this feature.
5883
5884 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5885 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5886
5887 @cindex portable file name handling
5888 @cindex file names, portability
5889 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5890 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5891 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5892 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5893 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
5894 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
5895 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5896 name, use the following portable macros:
5897
5898 @table @code
5899 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5900 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5901 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5902 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
5903 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5904 such hosts.
5905
5906 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5907 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5908 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5909 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5910 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5911 pass.
5912
5913 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5914 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5915 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5916 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5917 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5918 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5919
5920 @findex FILENAME_CMP
5921 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5922 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5923 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
5924 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5925 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5926
5927 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5928 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5929 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5930 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5931 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5932
5933 @findex SLASH_STRING
5934 @item SLASH_STRING
5935 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5936 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5937 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5938 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5939 @end table
5940
5941 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5942 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
5943 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5944 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5945 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5946 with @code{strrchr}.
5947
5948 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5949 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5950 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5951 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5952 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
5953 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5954 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5955 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5956 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
5957 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5958 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
5959 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5960 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5961
5962 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5963 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5964 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5965 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5966 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5967 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5968 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5969 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5970
5971 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5972 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5973 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
5974 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5975
5976
5977 @node Porting GDB
5978
5979 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5980 @cindex porting to new machines
5981
5982 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5983 specifying the configuration of the machine. This is done in a
5984 dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5985 hope to make more sensible soon. Let's say your new host is called an
5986 @var{xyz} (e.g., @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5987 name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5988 @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}). In particular:
5989
5990 @itemize @bullet
5991 @item
5992 In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5993 @var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5994 vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file. Also, add
5995 @var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5996 @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}. You can test your changes by
5997 running
5998
5999 @smallexample
6000 ./config.sub @var{xyz}
6001 @end smallexample
6002
6003 @noindent
6004 and
6005
6006 @smallexample
6007 ./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
6008 @end smallexample
6009
6010 @noindent
6011 which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
6012 and no error messages.
6013
6014 @noindent
6015 You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already. Porting BFD is
6016 beyond the scope of this manual.
6017
6018 @item
6019 To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
6020 your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
6021 desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
6022 setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
6023 @var{xyz}).
6024
6025 @emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress. The file
6026 @file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
6027 new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
6028 Recent changes have removed this requirement. The file now only needs
6029 to be modified when adding a new native configuration. This will likely
6030 changed again in the future.}
6031
6032 @item
6033 Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
6034 target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
6035 configuration.
6036 @end itemize
6037
6038 @node Versions and Branches
6039 @chapter Versions and Branches
6040
6041 @section Versions
6042
6043 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6044 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6045
6046 @table @asis
6047 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6048 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6049 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6050 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6051 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
6052 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6053 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6054 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
6055 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6056 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6057 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6058 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6059 may include additional changes
6060 @end table
6061
6062 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6063 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6064 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6065 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6066
6067 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
6068 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
6069 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
6070 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6071 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6072 @var{patchlevel}.
6073
6074 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6075 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6076
6077 @table @asis
6078 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6079 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6080 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6081 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6082 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
6083 6.1.90.20020304)
6084 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6085 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6086 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6087 @end table
6088
6089 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
6090 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6091 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6092
6093 @smallexample
6094 <HEAD>
6095 |
6096 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
6097 |
6098 +--------------------------.
6099 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
6100 | |
6101 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
6102 | |
6103 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6104 | |
6105 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
6106 | |
6107 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6108 | |
6109 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
6110 | |
6111 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6112 | |
6113 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
6114 | |
6115 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
6116 |
6117 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6118 |
6119 +--------------------------.
6120 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
6121 | |
6122 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
6123 | |
6124 @end smallexample
6125
6126 @section Release Branches
6127 @cindex Release Branches
6128
6129 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6130 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6131 branch tags:
6132
6133 @smallexample
6134 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6135 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6136 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6137 @end smallexample
6138
6139 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6140 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6141 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
6142 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6143
6144 @section Vendor Branches
6145 @cindex vendor branches
6146
6147 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6148 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6149 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6150 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6151 Inc Patch 2)}.
6152
6153 @section Experimental Branches
6154 @cindex experimental branches
6155
6156 @subsection Guidelines
6157
6158 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6159 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
6160 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6161 significant new developments.
6162
6163 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6164
6165 @table @emph
6166
6167 @item a branch has an owner
6168 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6169 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6170 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6171
6172 @item all commits are posted
6173 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6174 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
6175 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6176 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6177
6178 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
6179 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6180 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6181
6182 @item a branch is focused
6183 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6184 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
6185 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6186
6187 @item a branch tracks mainline
6188 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
6189 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6190 mainline.
6191
6192 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6193 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6194 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
6195
6196 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6197 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6198 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6199 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6200
6201 @end table
6202
6203 @subsection Tags
6204 @anchor{Tags}
6205
6206 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6207 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6208
6209 @table @code
6210
6211 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6212 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6213 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6214 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
6215 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6216 @smallexample
6217 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6218 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6219 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6220 @end smallexample
6221
6222 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6223 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6224 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6225 use a command sequence like:
6226 @smallexample
6227 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6228 cvs update \
6229 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6230 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6231 @end smallexample
6232 @noindent
6233 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6234 merge.
6235
6236 @end table
6237
6238 @noindent
6239 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6240 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6241
6242 @node Start of New Year Procedure
6243 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6244 @cindex new year procedure
6245
6246 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6247
6248 @itemize @bullet
6249 @item
6250 Rotate the ChangeLog file
6251
6252 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6253 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6254 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6255 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
6256 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6257 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6258 @smallexample
6259 Local Variables:
6260 mode: change-log
6261 left-margin: 8
6262 fill-column: 74
6263 version-control: never
6264 End:
6265 @end smallexample
6266
6267 @item
6268 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6269 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6270
6271 @item
6272 Update the copyright year in the startup message
6273
6274 Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
6275 @code{print_gdb_version}.
6276 @end itemize
6277
6278 @node Releasing GDB
6279
6280 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6281 @cindex making a new release of gdb
6282
6283 @section Branch Commit Policy
6284
6285 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6286 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6287
6288 @itemize @bullet
6289 @item
6290 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6291 @item
6292 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6293 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6294 file is better than committing a hack.
6295 @item
6296 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6297 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6298 when debugging a static binary?
6299 @item
6300 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6301 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6302 @item
6303 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6304 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6305 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6306 @end itemize
6307
6308 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6309 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6310 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6311 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6312
6313
6314 @section Obsoleting code
6315
6316 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6317 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6318 (an old target, an unused file).
6319
6320 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6321 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6322 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6323
6324 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6325 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6326 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6327
6328 @enumerate
6329 @item
6330 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6331 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6332 recommended.
6333 @item
6334 Wait a week or so.
6335 @item
6336 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6337 Announcement mailing list}.
6338 @item
6339 Wait a week or so.
6340 @item
6341 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6342 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6343 @item
6344 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6345 released.
6346 @item
6347 Remove the obsolete code.
6348 @end enumerate
6349
6350 @noindent
6351 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6352 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6353 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6354 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6355 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6356 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6357
6358
6359
6360 @section Before the Branch
6361
6362 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6363 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6364 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6365 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6366 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6367
6368 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6369
6370 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6371 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6372 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6373
6374 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6375
6376 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6377 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6378 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6379
6380 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6381
6382 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6383
6384 @itemize @bullet
6385 @item
6386 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6387 @item
6388 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6389 file)
6390 @item
6391 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6392 @end itemize
6393
6394 @subheading Check the ARI
6395
6396 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6397 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6398 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6399 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6400 regressions.
6401
6402 @subsection Review the bug data base
6403
6404 Close anything obviously fixed.
6405
6406 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6407
6408 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6409
6410
6411 @section Cut the Branch
6412
6413 @subheading Create the branch
6414
6415 @smallexample
6416 $ u=5.1
6417 $ v=5.2
6418 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6419 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6420 $ echo $u $V $D
6421 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6422 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6423 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6424 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6425 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6426 $ ^echo ^^
6427 ...
6428 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6429 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6430 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6431 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6432 $ ^echo ^^
6433 ...
6434 $
6435 @end smallexample
6436
6437 @itemize @bullet
6438 @item
6439 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6440 date/time.
6441 @item
6442 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6443 @item
6444 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6445 @item
6446 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6447 @item
6448 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6449 @end itemize
6450
6451 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6452
6453 @smallexample
6454 $ u=5.1
6455 $ v=5.2
6456 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6457 $ echo $u $v$V
6458 5.1 5_2
6459 $ cd /tmp
6460 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6461 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6462 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6463 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6464 $ ^echo ^^
6465 U src/gdb/version.in
6466 $ cd src/gdb
6467 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6468 $ cat version.in
6469 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6470 $ cvs -f commit version.in
6471 @end smallexample
6472
6473 @itemize @bullet
6474 @item
6475 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6476 mechanism.
6477 @item
6478 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6479 initial branch version number.
6480 @end itemize
6481
6482
6483 @subheading Update the web and news pages
6484
6485 Something?
6486
6487 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6488
6489 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6490 This file needs to be updated so that:
6491
6492 @itemize @bullet
6493 @item
6494 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6495 @item
6496 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6497 @end itemize
6498
6499 @noindent
6500 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6501 cron table.
6502
6503 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6504 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6505 snapshot directories.
6506
6507
6508 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6509
6510 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6511 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6512 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6513
6514 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6515 current release.
6516
6517 @subheading Post the branch info
6518
6519 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6520
6521 @itemize @bullet
6522 @item
6523 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6524 @item
6525 @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6526 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6527 @end itemize
6528
6529 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6530 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6531 list are alerted.}
6532
6533 The announcement should include:
6534
6535 @itemize @bullet
6536 @item
6537 The branch tag.
6538 @item
6539 How to check out the branch using CVS.
6540 @item
6541 The date/number of weeks until the release.
6542 @item
6543 The branch commit policy still holds.
6544 @end itemize
6545
6546 @section Stabilize the branch
6547
6548 Something goes here.
6549
6550 @section Create a Release
6551
6552 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6553 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
6554 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
6555 process of releasing that tar ball.
6556
6557 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6558
6559 @subsection Create a release candidate
6560
6561 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6562 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6563 candidate).
6564
6565 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
6566
6567 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6568 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6569
6570 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6571
6572 @smallexample
6573 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
6574 $ v=5.2
6575 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6576 $ echo $t/$b/$v
6577 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6578 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6579 $ cd $t/$b/$v
6580 $ pwd
6581 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6582 $ which autoconf
6583 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6584 $
6585 @end smallexample
6586
6587 @noindent
6588 Notes:
6589
6590 @itemize @bullet
6591 @item
6592 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
6593 version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6594 found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6595 unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6596 @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6597 @end itemize
6598
6599 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6600
6601 @smallexample
6602 $ for m in gdb insight
6603 do
6604 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6605 done
6606 $
6607 @end smallexample
6608
6609 @noindent
6610 Note:
6611
6612 @itemize @bullet
6613 @item
6614 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6615 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6616 @code{cvs} really does.
6617 @end itemize
6618
6619 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
6620
6621 @table @file
6622
6623 @item gdb/NEWS
6624
6625 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
6626 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6627
6628 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6629
6630 @smallexample
6631 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6632 ...
6633 c-x 4 a
6634 ...
6635 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6636 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6637 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6638 @end smallexample
6639
6640 @item gdb/README
6641
6642 You'll need to update:
6643
6644 @itemize @bullet
6645 @item
6646 The version.
6647 @item
6648 The update date.
6649 @item
6650 Who did it.
6651 @end itemize
6652
6653 @smallexample
6654 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6655 ...
6656 c-x 4 a
6657 ...
6658 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6659 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6660 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6661 @end smallexample
6662
6663 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6664 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6665 to get it updated.}
6666
6667 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6668 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
6669 pursuing.}
6670
6671 @item gdb/version.in
6672
6673 @smallexample
6674 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6675 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6676 5.2
6677 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6678 ...
6679 c-x 4 a
6680 ... Bump to version ...
6681 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6682 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6683 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6684 @end smallexample
6685
6686 @end table
6687
6688 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
6689
6690 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6691
6692 @smallexample
6693 $ for m in gdb insight
6694 do
6695 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6696 done
6697 @end smallexample
6698
6699 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6700 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6701
6702 @smallexample
6703 $ for m in gdb insight
6704 do
6705 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6706 done
6707 @end smallexample
6708
6709 @subsubheading Check the source files
6710
6711 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6712 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
6713 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6714
6715 @smallexample
6716 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6717 M djunpack.bat
6718 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6719 ? proto-toplev
6720 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6721 M gdb/ChangeLog
6722 M gdb/NEWS
6723 M gdb/README
6724 M gdb/version.in
6725 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6726 $
6727 @end smallexample
6728
6729 @noindent
6730 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6731 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6732 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6733 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
6734
6735 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6736
6737 @smallexample
6738 $ cp */src/*.tar .
6739 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
6740 $ ls -F
6741 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6742 $ for m in gdb insight
6743 do
6744 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6745 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6746 done
6747 $
6748 @end smallexample
6749
6750 @noindent
6751 Note:
6752
6753 @itemize @bullet
6754 @item
6755 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6756 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6757 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
6758 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6759 @end itemize
6760
6761 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6762
6763 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6764
6765 @smallexample
6766 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6767 $ cd gdb-5.2
6768 $ ./configure
6769 $ make
6770 @dots{}
6771 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6772 GNU gdb 5.2
6773 @dots{}
6774 (gdb) b main
6775 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6776 (gdb) run
6777 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6778
6779 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6780 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6781 (gdb) print args
6782 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6783 (gdb)
6784 @end smallexample
6785
6786 @subsection Make a release candidate available
6787
6788 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6789
6790 @enumerate
6791 @item
6792 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6793 @item
6794 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6795 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6796 process can restart.
6797 @item
6798 Make the release candidate available in
6799 @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6800 @item
6801 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6802 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6803 @end enumerate
6804
6805 @subsection Make a formal release available
6806
6807 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6808
6809 @subsubheading Install on sware
6810
6811 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6812
6813 @smallexample
6814 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6815 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6816 @end smallexample
6817
6818 @noindent
6819 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6820 are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6821
6822 @smallexample
6823 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6824 $ rm @dots{}
6825 @end smallexample
6826
6827 @noindent
6828 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6829 directory:
6830
6831 @smallexample
6832 $ vi README
6833 @dots{}
6834 $ rm -f .message
6835 $ ln README .message
6836 @end smallexample
6837
6838 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
6839
6840 @table @file
6841
6842 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6843 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6844 @itemize @bullet
6845 @item
6846 General announcement.
6847 @item
6848 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6849 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6850 @item
6851 Errata.
6852 @end itemize
6853
6854 @item htdocs/index.html
6855 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6856 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6857 These files include:
6858 @itemize @bullet
6859 @item
6860 Announcement of the most recent release.
6861 @item
6862 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6863 @end itemize
6864 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6865
6866 @item download/onlinedocs/
6867 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6868 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
6869 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6870 Something like:
6871
6872 @smallexample
6873 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6874 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6875 $PWD/www \
6876 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6877 gdb
6878 @end smallexample
6879
6880 @item download/ari/
6881 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
6882
6883 @smallexample
6884 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6885 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6886 $PWD/www \
6887 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6888 gdb
6889 @end smallexample
6890
6891 @end table
6892
6893 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6894
6895 Something goes here.
6896
6897
6898 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6899
6900 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6901 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6902
6903 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6904
6905 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6906
6907 @itemize @bullet
6908 @item
6909 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6910 @item
6911 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6912 day or so to let things get out)
6913 @item
6914 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6915 @end itemize
6916
6917 @subsection Cleanup
6918
6919 The release is out but you're still not finished.
6920
6921 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6922
6923 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6924
6925 @itemize @bullet
6926 @item
6927 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6928 @item
6929 @file{gdb/version.in}
6930 @item
6931 @file{gdb/NEWS}
6932 @item
6933 @file{gdb/README}
6934 @end itemize
6935
6936 @subsubheading Tag the release
6937
6938 Something like:
6939
6940 @smallexample
6941 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6942 $ echo $d
6943 2002-01-24
6944 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6945 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6946 @end smallexample
6947
6948 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6949 @value{GDBN}.
6950
6951 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6952
6953 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6954 indicates when the release was made.
6955
6956 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6957
6958 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6959 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
6960 committed all the release changes it can be set to
6961 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6962 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6963
6964 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6965
6966 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
6967
6968 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6969 trunk.
6970
6971 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6972
6973 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6974 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
6975 generated by running:
6976
6977 @smallexample
6978 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6979 @end smallexample
6980
6981 @noindent
6982 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6983 of the most recent release.
6984
6985 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6986
6987 @section Post release
6988
6989 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6990
6991 @node Testsuite
6992
6993 @chapter Testsuite
6994 @cindex test suite
6995
6996 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6997 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6998 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6999 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7000 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7001
7002 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
7003 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7004 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7005
7006 @section Using the Testsuite
7007
7008 @cindex running the test suite
7009 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7010 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
7011 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
7012 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7013 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
7014 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7015
7016 @smallexample
7017 === gdb Summary ===
7018
7019 # of expected passes 6016
7020 # of unexpected failures 58
7021 # of unexpected successes 5
7022 # of expected failures 183
7023 # of unresolved testcases 3
7024 # of untested testcases 5
7025 @end smallexample
7026
7027 To run a specific test script, type:
7028 @example
7029 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7030 @end example
7031 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7032 spaces.
7033
7034 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7035 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
7036 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
7037 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7038 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7039 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7040 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
7041 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7042 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7043 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7044 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7045 program.
7046
7047 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7048 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7049 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7050 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7051 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
7052 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
7053 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7054 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7055 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7056
7057 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7058 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7059 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7060 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7061 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
7062 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7063 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7064 tests for all of those.
7065
7066 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
7067 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7068 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
7069 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7070
7071 @smallexample
7072 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7073 @end smallexample
7074
7075 @section Testsuite Organization
7076
7077 @cindex test suite organization
7078 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
7079 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7080 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7081 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
7082 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7083 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7084 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7085 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7086
7087 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7088 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
7089 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7090 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7091 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7092
7093 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7094 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7095 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7096 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7097 intelligibility.
7098
7099 @table @file
7100 @item gdb.base
7101 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
7102 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7103 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7104 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7105 for prototypes).
7106
7107 @item gdb.@var{lang}
7108 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
7109 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7110
7111 @item gdb.@var{platform}
7112 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7113 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7114 HP-UX.
7115
7116 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
7117 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
7118 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7119 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7120 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7121 extensions.
7122
7123 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7124 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
7125 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7126 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7127 @end table
7128
7129 @section Writing Tests
7130 @cindex writing tests
7131
7132 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7133 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7134
7135 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7136 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7137 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7138 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7139 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7140
7141 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7142 necessary. Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7143 a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}. Like @code{gdb_test},
7144 @code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7145 prompts.
7146
7147 Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7148 On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7149 spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7150
7151 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7152 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7153 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7154 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7155 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7156 uniformly.
7157
7158 @node Hints
7159
7160 @chapter Hints
7161
7162 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7163 appear anywhere else in the directory.
7164
7165 @menu
7166 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7167 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7168 @end menu
7169
7170 @node Getting Started,,, Hints
7171
7172 @section Getting Started
7173
7174 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7175 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
7176 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7177
7178 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7179 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7180
7181 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7182 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
7183 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7184 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7185 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7186 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
7187 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7188
7189 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7190 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
7191 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
7192 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7193 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
7194 also documents all the available macros.
7195 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7196 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7197 @c Conditionals})
7198
7199 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
7200 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7201 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7202 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7203
7204 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7205 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
7206 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7207 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7208 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
7209 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7210 approach.
7211
7212 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7213 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7214 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
7215 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7216 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7217 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7218 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
7219 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7220 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
7221 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7222 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7223 look like.
7224
7225 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7226 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
7227 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7228 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7229 rather than worrying about all its details.
7230
7231 @cindex command implementation
7232 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7233 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
7234 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7235 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
7236 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7237 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7238 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7239 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
7240 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7241 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
7242 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7243 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7244 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7245
7246 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7247 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7248 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7249 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7250 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7251 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7252
7253 @node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
7254
7255 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7256 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7257
7258 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7259 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7260 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7261 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7262 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7263 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7264
7265 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7266 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7267 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7268 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7269 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7270
7271 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7272 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7273 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7274 @kbd{M-.}
7275
7276 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7277 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7278
7279 @section Submitting Patches
7280
7281 @cindex submitting patches
7282 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7283 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7284 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7285 changes.
7286
7287 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7288 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7289
7290 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7291 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7292 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7293
7294 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
7295 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7296 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7297 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
7298 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7299 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
7300 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7301 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7302 etc) can be
7303 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7304 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
7305 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7306 since we maintain it for them).
7307
7308 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7309 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7310 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7311 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7312 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7313 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7314 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
7315 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7316
7317 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7318 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7319 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
7320 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
7321
7322 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7323 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
7324 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7325 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7326 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7327 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7328 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7329 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7330 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7331 acceptable.
7332
7333 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
7334 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7335 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7336 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
7337 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7338 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7339 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7340 be for quite some time.
7341
7342 Please send patches directly to
7343 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7344
7345 @section Obsolete Conditionals
7346 @cindex obsolete code
7347
7348 Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7349 configuration macros. They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7350 should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7351
7352 @table @code
7353 @item STACK_END_ADDR
7354 This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7355 in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7356 core file itself. This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7357 gets the info portably from there. The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7358 files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7359 and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7360
7361 Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7362 is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD. Now that's old!
7363
7364 @end table
7365
7366 @include observer.texi
7367 @raisesections
7368 @include fdl.texi
7369 @lowersections
7370
7371 @node Index
7372 @unnumbered Index
7373
7374 @printindex cp
7375
7376 @bye
This page took 0.199057 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.